Mercurial > emacs
annotate doc/misc/cc-mode.texi @ 107521:54f3a4d055ee
Document font-use-system-font.
* cmdargs.texi (Font X): Move most content to Fonts.
* frames.texi (Fonts): New node. Document font-use-system-font.
* emacs.texi (Top):
* xresources.texi (Table of Resources):
* mule.texi (Defining Fontsets, Charsets): Update xrefs.
| author | Chong Yidong <cyd@stupidchicken.com> |
|---|---|
| date | Sat, 20 Mar 2010 13:24:06 -0400 |
| parents | 66e0d01014c6 |
| children | a91e94388547 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 84286 | 1 \input texinfo |
| 2 @c Notes to self regarding line handling: | |
| 3 @c | |
| 4 @c Empty lines are often significant before @end directives; avoid them. | |
| 5 @c | |
| 6 @c Empty lines before and after @example directives are significant in | |
| 7 @c info output but not in TeX. Empty lines inside @example directives | |
| 8 @c are significant. | |
| 9 | |
| 10 @c Conventions for formatting examples: | |
| 11 @c o If the example contains empty lines then put the surrounding empty | |
| 12 @c lines inside the @example directives. Put them outside otherwise. | |
| 13 @c o Use @group inside the example only if it shows indentation where | |
| 14 @c the relation between lines inside is relevant. | |
| 15 @c o Format line number columns like this: | |
| 16 @c 1: foo | |
| 17 @c 2: bar | |
| 18 @c ^ one space | |
| 19 @c ^^ two columns, right alignment | |
| 20 @c o Check line lengths in TeX output; they can typically be no longer | |
| 21 @c than 70 chars, 60 if the paragraph is indented. | |
| 22 | |
| 23 @comment TBD: Document the finer details of statement anchoring? | |
| 24 | |
| 25 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 26 @comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region) | |
| 27 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 28 | |
| 29 | |
| 30 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 31 @comment How to make the various output formats: | |
| 32 @comment (Thanks to Robert Chassell for supplying this information.) | |
| 33 @comment Note that Texinfo 4.7 (or later) is needed. | |
| 34 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 35 @ignore | |
| 36 In each of the following pairs of commands, the first generates a | |
| 37 version with cross references pointing to the GNU Emacs manuals, | |
| 38 the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals. | |
| 39 ## Info output | |
| 40 makeinfo cc-mode.texi | |
| 41 makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 42 | |
| 43 ## DVI output | |
| 44 ## You may need to set up the environment variable TEXINPUTS so | |
| 45 ## that tex can find the file texinfo.tex - See the tex | |
| 46 ## manpage. | |
| 47 texi2dvi cc-mode.texi | |
| 48 texi2dvi -t "@set XEMACS " cc-mode.texi | |
| 49 | |
| 50 ## HTML output. (The --no-split parameter is optional) | |
| 51 makeinfo --html --no-split cc-mode.texi | |
| 52 makeinfo --html --no-split -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 53 | |
| 54 ## Plain text output | |
| 55 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 56 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt cc-mode.texi | |
| 57 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 58 --no-headers --output=cc-mode.txt -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 59 | |
| 60 ## DocBook output | |
| 61 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 62 cc-mode.texi | |
| 63 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 64 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 65 | |
| 66 ## XML output | |
| 67 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 68 cc-mode.texi | |
| 69 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \ | |
| 70 -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi | |
| 71 | |
| 72 #### (You must be in the same directory as the viewed file.) | |
| 73 | |
| 74 ## View DVI output | |
| 75 xdvi cc-mode.dvi & | |
| 76 | |
| 77 ## View HTML output | |
| 78 mozilla cc-mode.html | |
| 79 @end ignore | |
| 80 | |
| 81 @comment No overfull hbox marks in the dvi file. | |
| 82 @finalout | |
| 83 | |
|
84329
3d431f1997d8
(setfilename): Go up one more level to ../../info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
84286
diff
changeset
|
84 @setfilename ../../info/ccmode |
| 84286 | 85 @settitle CC Mode Manual |
| 86 @footnotestyle end | |
| 87 | |
| 88 @c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the | |
| 89 @c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the | |
| 90 @c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it | |
| 91 @c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g. with | |
| 92 @c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi". | |
| 93 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 94 @macro emacsman | |
| 95 xemacs | |
| 96 @end macro | |
| 97 @macro emacsmantitle | |
| 98 XEmacs User's Manual | |
| 99 @end macro | |
| 100 @macro lispref | |
| 101 lispref | |
| 102 @end macro | |
| 103 @macro lispreftitle | |
| 104 XEmacs Lisp Reference Manual | |
| 105 @end macro | |
| 106 @end ifset | |
| 107 | |
| 108 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 109 @macro emacsman | |
| 110 emacs | |
| 111 @end macro | |
| 112 @macro emacsmantitle | |
| 113 GNU Emacs Manual | |
| 114 @end macro | |
| 115 @macro lispref | |
| 116 elisp | |
| 117 @end macro | |
| 118 @macro lispreftitle | |
| 119 GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual | |
| 120 @end macro | |
| 121 @end ifclear | |
| 122 | |
| 123 | |
| 124 @macro ccmode | |
| 125 CC Mode | |
| 126 @end macro | |
| 127 | |
| 128 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 129 @comment @setchapternewpage odd !! we don't want blank pages !! | |
| 130 @comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region) | |
| 131 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 132 | |
| 133 | |
| 134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 135 @comment | |
| 136 @comment Texinfo manual for CC Mode | |
| 137 @comment Generated from the original README file by Krishna Padmasola | |
| 138 @comment <krishna@earth-gw.njit.edu> | |
| 139 @comment | |
| 140 @comment Authors: | |
| 141 @comment Barry A. Warsaw | |
| 142 @comment Martin Stjernholm | |
| 143 @comment Alan Mackenzie | |
| 144 @comment | |
| 145 @comment Maintained by Martin Stjernholm and Alan Mackenzie <bug-cc-mode@gnu.org> | |
| 146 @comment | |
| 147 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 148 | |
| 149 @comment Define an index for syntactic symbols. | |
| 150 @ifnottex @c In texi2dvi, the @defindex would create an empty cc-mode.ss | |
| 151 @c For Info, unlike tex, @syncodeindex needs a matching @defindex. | |
| 152 @defindex ss | |
| 153 @end ifnottex | |
| 154 | |
| 155 @comment Combine key, syntactic symbol and concept indices into one. | |
| 156 @syncodeindex ss cp | |
| 157 @syncodeindex ky cp | |
| 158 | |
| 159 @copying | |
| 160 This manual is for CC Mode in Emacs. | |
| 161 | |
| 162 Copyright @copyright{} 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, | |
| 106815 | 163 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 84286 | 164 |
| 165 @quotation | |
| 166 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document | |
|
99709
6de181810d0f
Relicense all texi files under FDL 1.3 or later.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
96449
diff
changeset
|
167 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or |
|
95936
ce35dd677448
Remove references to external license, since doclicense is included.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95874
diff
changeset
|
168 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
|
ce35dd677448
Remove references to external license, since doclicense is included.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95874
diff
changeset
|
169 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual'', |
|
ce35dd677448
Remove references to external license, since doclicense is included.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95874
diff
changeset
|
170 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license |
|
ce35dd677448
Remove references to external license, since doclicense is included.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95874
diff
changeset
|
171 is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''. |
| 84286 | 172 |
|
95874
eafbd7a5c9be
Update Back-Cover Text as per maintain.info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
92570
diff
changeset
|
173 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to copy and |
|
eafbd7a5c9be
Update Back-Cover Text as per maintain.info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
92570
diff
changeset
|
174 modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF supports it in |
|
eafbd7a5c9be
Update Back-Cover Text as per maintain.info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
92570
diff
changeset
|
175 developing GNU and promoting software freedom.'' |
| 84286 | 176 @end quotation |
| 177 @end copying | |
| 178 | |
| 179 @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation | |
| 180 @comment here is by request from the FSF folks. | |
| 181 @dircategory Emacs | |
| 182 @direntry | |
| 183 * CC Mode: (ccmode). Emacs mode for editing C, C++, Objective-C, | |
| 184 Java, Pike, AWK, and CORBA IDL code. | |
| 185 @end direntry | |
| 186 | |
| 187 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 188 @comment TeX title page | |
| 189 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 190 | |
| 191 @titlepage | |
| 192 @sp 10 | |
| 193 | |
| 194 @center @titlefont{CC Mode 5.31} | |
| 195 @sp 2 | |
| 196 @center @subtitlefont{A GNU Emacs mode for editing C and C-like languages} | |
| 197 @sp 2 | |
| 198 @center Barry A. Warsaw, Martin Stjernholm, Alan Mackenzie | |
| 199 | |
| 200 @page | |
| 201 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll | |
| 202 @insertcopying | |
| 203 | |
|
85173
de920bbb6866
Remove RCS keywords from doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
84329
diff
changeset
|
204 This manual was generated from cc-mode.texi, which can be downloaded |
|
de920bbb6866
Remove RCS keywords from doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
Miles Bader <miles@gnu.org>
parents:
84329
diff
changeset
|
205 from |
|
84329
3d431f1997d8
(setfilename): Go up one more level to ../../info.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
84286
diff
changeset
|
206 @url{http://cvs.savannah.gnu.org/viewcvs/emacs/emacs/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi}. |
| 84286 | 207 @end titlepage |
| 208 | |
| 209 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 210 @comment The Top node contains the master menu for the Info file. | |
| 211 @comment This appears only in the Info file, not the printed manual. | |
| 212 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 213 | |
|
102059
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
214 @summarycontents |
|
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
215 @contents |
|
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
216 |
| 84286 | 217 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir) |
| 218 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 219 | |
|
102059
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
220 @ifnottex |
| 84286 | 221 @top @ccmode{} |
| 222 | |
| 223 @ccmode{} is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, C++, | |
| 224 Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants PSDL and CIDL), Pike | |
| 225 and AWK code. It provides syntax-based indentation, font locking, and | |
| 226 has several handy commands and some minor modes to make the editing | |
| 227 easier. It does not provide tools to look up and navigate between | |
| 228 functions, classes etc - there are other packages for that. | |
|
102059
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
229 |
|
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
230 @insertcopying |
|
9bcea07061a8
consistently use @insertcopying, @direntry, @contents
Karl Berry <karl@gnu.org>
parents:
100974
diff
changeset
|
231 @end ifnottex |
| 84286 | 232 |
| 233 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 234 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 235 | |
| 236 @menu | |
| 237 * Introduction:: | |
| 238 * Overview:: | |
| 239 * Getting Started:: | |
| 240 * Commands:: | |
| 241 * Font Locking:: | |
| 242 * Config Basics:: | |
| 243 * Custom Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 244 * Custom Auto-newlines:: | |
| 245 * Clean-ups:: | |
| 246 * Indentation Engine Basics:: | |
| 247 * Customizing Indentation:: | |
| 248 * Custom Macros:: | |
| 249 * Odds and Ends:: | |
| 250 * Sample .emacs File:: | |
| 251 * Performance Issues:: | |
| 252 * Limitations and Known Bugs:: | |
| 253 * FAQ:: | |
| 254 * Updating CC Mode:: | |
| 255 * Mailing Lists and Bug Reports:: | |
| 256 * GNU Free Documentation License:: | |
| 257 * Command and Function Index:: | |
| 258 * Variable Index:: | |
| 259 * Concept and Key Index:: | |
| 260 | |
| 261 @detailmenu | |
| 262 --- The Detailed Node Listing --- | |
| 263 | |
| 264 Commands | |
| 265 | |
| 266 * Indentation Commands:: | |
| 267 * Comment Commands:: | |
| 268 * Movement Commands:: | |
| 269 * Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 270 * Minor Modes:: | |
| 271 * Electric Keys:: | |
| 272 * Auto-newlines:: | |
| 273 * Hungry WS Deletion:: | |
| 274 * Subword Movement:: | |
| 275 * Other Commands:: | |
| 276 | |
| 277 Font Locking | |
| 278 | |
| 279 * Font Locking Preliminaries:: | |
| 280 * Faces:: | |
| 281 * Doc Comments:: | |
| 282 * AWK Mode Font Locking:: | |
| 283 | |
| 284 Configuration Basics | |
| 285 | |
| 286 * CC Hooks:: | |
| 287 * Style Variables:: | |
| 288 * Styles:: | |
| 289 | |
| 290 Styles | |
| 291 | |
| 292 * Built-in Styles:: | |
| 293 * Choosing a Style:: | |
| 294 * Adding Styles:: | |
| 295 * File Styles:: | |
| 296 | |
| 297 Customizing Auto-newlines | |
| 298 | |
| 299 * Hanging Braces:: | |
| 300 * Hanging Colons:: | |
| 301 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas:: | |
| 302 | |
| 303 Hanging Braces | |
| 304 | |
| 305 * Custom Braces:: | |
| 306 | |
| 307 Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 308 | |
| 309 * Syntactic Analysis:: | |
| 310 * Syntactic Symbols:: | |
| 311 * Indentation Calculation:: | |
| 312 | |
| 313 Syntactic Symbols | |
| 314 | |
| 315 * Function Symbols:: | |
| 316 * Class Symbols:: | |
| 317 * Conditional Construct Symbols:: | |
| 318 * Switch Statement Symbols:: | |
| 319 * Brace List Symbols:: | |
| 320 * External Scope Symbols:: | |
| 321 * Paren List Symbols:: | |
| 322 * Literal Symbols:: | |
| 323 * Multiline Macro Symbols:: | |
| 324 * Objective-C Method Symbols:: | |
| 325 * Anonymous Class Symbol:: | |
| 326 * Statement Block Symbols:: | |
| 327 * K&R Symbols:: | |
| 328 | |
| 329 Customizing Indentation | |
| 330 | |
| 331 * c-offsets-alist:: | |
| 332 * Interactive Customization:: | |
| 333 * Line-Up Functions:: | |
| 334 * Custom Line-Up:: | |
| 335 * Other Indentation:: | |
| 336 | |
| 337 Line-Up Functions | |
| 338 | |
| 339 * Brace/Paren Line-Up:: | |
| 340 * List Line-Up:: | |
| 341 * Operator Line-Up:: | |
| 342 * Comment Line-Up:: | |
| 343 * Misc Line-Up:: | |
| 344 | |
| 345 @end detailmenu | |
| 346 @end menu | |
| 347 | |
| 348 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 349 @node Introduction, Overview, Top, Top | |
| 350 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 351 @chapter Introduction | |
| 352 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 353 | |
| 354 @cindex BOCM | |
| 355 @cindex history | |
| 356 @cindex awk-mode.el | |
| 357 @cindex c-mode.el | |
| 358 @cindex c++-mode.el | |
| 359 | |
| 360 Welcome to @ccmode{}, a GNU Emacs mode for editing files containing C, | |
| 361 C++, Objective-C, Java, CORBA IDL (and the variants CORBA PSDL and | |
| 362 CIDL), Pike and AWK code. This incarnation of the mode is descended | |
| 363 from @file{c-mode.el} (also called ``Boring Old C Mode'' or BOCM | |
| 364 @t{:-)}, @file{c++-mode.el} version 2, which Barry Warsaw had been | |
| 365 maintaining since 1992, and @file{awk-mode.el}, a long neglected mode | |
| 366 in the (X)Emacs base. | |
| 367 | |
| 368 Late in 1997, Martin Stjernholm joined Barry on the @ccmode{} | |
| 369 Maintainers Team, and implemented the Pike support. In 2000 Martin | |
| 370 took over as the sole maintainer. In 2001 Alan Mackenzie joined the | |
| 371 team, implementing AWK support in version 5.30. @ccmode{} did not | |
| 372 originally contain the font lock support for its languages --- that | |
| 373 was added in version 5.30. | |
| 374 | |
| 375 This manual describes @ccmode{} | |
| 376 @comment The following line must appear on its own, so that the | |
| 377 version 5.31. | |
| 378 @comment Release.py script can update the version number automatically | |
| 379 | |
| 380 @ccmode{} supports the editing of K&R and ANSI C, C++, Objective-C, | |
| 381 Java, CORBA's Interface Definition Language, Pike@footnote{A C-like | |
| 382 scripting language with its roots in the LPC language used in some MUD | |
| 383 engines. See @uref{http://pike.ida.liu.se/}.} and AWK files. In this | |
| 384 way, you can easily set up consistent font locking and coding styles for | |
| 385 use in editing all of these languages, although AWK is not yet as | |
| 386 uniformly integrated as the other languages. | |
| 387 | |
| 388 @findex c-mode | |
| 389 @findex c++-mode | |
| 390 @findex objc-mode | |
| 391 @findex java-mode | |
| 392 @findex idl-mode | |
| 393 @findex pike-mode | |
| 394 @findex awk-mode | |
| 395 Note that the name of this package is ``@ccmode{}'', but there is no top | |
| 396 level @code{cc-mode} entry point. All of the variables, commands, and | |
| 397 functions in @ccmode{} are prefixed with @code{c-@var{thing}}, and | |
| 398 @code{c-mode}, @code{c++-mode}, @code{objc-mode}, @code{java-mode}, | |
| 399 @code{idl-mode}, @code{pike-mode}, and @code{awk-mode} entry points are | |
| 400 provided. This package is intended to be a replacement for | |
| 401 @file{c-mode.el}, @file{c++-mode.el} and @file{awk-mode.el}. | |
| 402 | |
| 403 A special word of thanks goes to Krishna Padmasola for his work in | |
| 404 converting the original @file{README} file to Texinfo format. I'd | |
| 405 also like to thank all the @ccmode{} victims who help enormously | |
| 406 during the early beta stages of @ccmode{}'s development. | |
| 407 | |
| 408 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 409 @node Overview, Getting Started, Introduction, Top | |
| 410 @comment node-name, next, previous, up@cindex organization of the manual | |
| 411 @chapter Overview of the Manual | |
| 412 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 413 | |
| 414 @noindent | |
| 415 The manual starts with several introductory chapters (including this | |
| 416 one). | |
| 417 | |
| 418 @noindent | |
| 419 The next chunk of the manual describes the day to day @emph{use} of | |
| 420 @ccmode{} (as contrasted with how to customize it). | |
| 421 | |
| 422 @itemize @bullet | |
| 423 @item | |
| 424 The chapter ``Commands'' describes in detail how to use (nearly) all | |
| 425 of @ccmode{}'s features. There are extensive cross-references from | |
| 426 here to the corresponding sections later in the manual which tell you | |
| 427 how to customize these features. | |
| 428 | |
| 429 @item | |
| 430 ``Font Locking'' describes how ``syntax highlighting'' is applied to | |
| 431 your buffers. It is mainly background information and can be skipped | |
| 432 over at a first reading. | |
| 433 @end itemize | |
| 434 | |
| 435 @noindent | |
| 436 The next chunk of the manual describes how to @emph{customize} | |
| 437 @ccmode{}. Typically, an overview of a topic is given at the chapter | |
| 438 level, then the sections and subsections describe the material in | |
| 439 increasing detail. | |
| 440 | |
| 441 @itemize @bullet | |
| 442 @item | |
| 443 The chapter ``Configuration Basics'' tells you @emph{how} to write | |
| 444 customizations - whether in hooks, in styles, in both, or in neither, | |
| 445 depending on your needs. It describes the @ccmode{} style system and | |
| 446 lists the standard styles that @ccmode{} supplies. | |
| 447 | |
| 448 @item | |
| 449 The next few chapters describe in detail how to customize the various | |
| 450 features of @ccmode{}. | |
| 451 | |
| 452 @item | |
| 453 Finally, there is a sample @file{.emacs} fragment, which might help you | |
| 454 in creating your own customization. | |
| 455 @end itemize | |
| 456 | |
| 457 @noindent | |
| 458 The manual ends with ``this and that'', things that don't fit cleanly | |
| 459 into any of the previous chunks. | |
| 460 | |
| 461 @itemize @bullet | |
| 462 @item | |
| 463 Two chapters discuss the performance of @ccmode{} and known | |
| 464 bugs/limitations. | |
| 465 | |
| 466 @item | |
| 467 The FAQ contains a list of common problems and questions. | |
| 468 | |
| 469 @item | |
| 470 The next two chapters tell you how to get in touch with the @ccmode{} | |
| 471 project - whether for updating @ccmode{} or submitting bug reports. | |
| 472 @end itemize | |
| 473 | |
| 474 @noindent | |
| 475 Finally, there are the customary indices. | |
| 476 | |
| 477 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 478 @node Getting Started, Commands, Overview, Top | |
| 479 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 480 @chapter Getting Started | |
| 481 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 482 | |
| 483 If you got this version of @ccmode{} with Emacs or XEmacs, it should | |
| 484 work just fine right out of the box. Note however that you might not | |
| 485 have the latest @ccmode{} release and might want to upgrade your copy | |
| 486 (see below). | |
| 487 | |
| 87453 | 488 You should probably start by skimming through the entire Commands chapter |
| 489 (@pxref{Commands}) to get an overview of @ccmode{}'s capabilities. | |
| 84286 | 490 |
| 491 After trying out some commands, you may dislike some aspects of | |
| 492 @ccmode{}'s default configuration. Here is an outline of how to | |
| 493 change some of the settings that newcomers to @ccmode{} most often | |
| 494 want to change: | |
| 495 | |
| 496 @table @asis | |
| 497 @item c-basic-offset | |
| 498 This Lisp variable holds an integer, the number of columns @ccmode{} | |
| 499 indents nested code. To set this value to 6, customize | |
| 500 @code{c-basic-offset} or put this into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 501 | |
| 502 @example | |
| 503 (setq c-basic-offset 6) | |
| 504 @end example | |
| 505 | |
| 506 @item The (indentation) style | |
| 507 The basic ``shape'' of indentation created by @ccmode{}---by default, | |
| 508 this is @code{gnu} style (except for Java and AWK buffers). A list of | |
| 509 the available styles and their descriptions can be found in | |
| 510 @ref{Built-in Styles}. A complete specification of the @ccmode{} | |
| 511 style system, including how to create your own style, can be found in | |
| 512 the chapter @ref{Styles}. To set your style to @code{linux}, either | |
| 513 customize @code{c-default-style} or put this into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 514 | |
| 515 @example | |
| 516 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java") | |
| 517 (awk-mode . "awk") | |
| 518 (other . "linux"))) | |
| 519 @end example | |
| 520 | |
| 521 @item Electric Indentation | |
| 522 Normally, when you type ``punctuation'' characters such as @samp{;} or | |
| 523 @samp{@{}, @ccmode{} instantly reindents the current line. This can | |
| 524 be disconcerting until you get used to it. To disable @dfn{electric | |
| 525 indentation} in the current buffer, type @kbd{C-c C-l}. Type the same | |
| 526 thing to enable it again. To have electric indentation disabled by | |
| 527 default, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file@footnote{There | |
| 528 is no ``easy customization'' facility for making this change.}: | |
| 529 | |
| 530 @example | |
| 531 (setq-default c-electric-flag nil) | |
| 532 @end example | |
| 533 | |
| 534 @noindent | |
| 535 Details of this and other similar ``Minor Modes'' appear in the | |
| 536 section @ref{Minor Modes}. | |
| 537 | |
| 538 @item Making the @key{RET} key indent the new line | |
| 539 The standard Emacs binding for @key{RET} just adds a new line. If you | |
| 540 want it to reindent the new line as well, rebind the key. Note that | |
| 541 the action of rebinding would fail if the pertinent keymap didn't yet | |
| 542 exist---we thus need to delay the action until after @ccmode{} has | |
| 543 been loaded. Put the following code into your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 544 | |
| 545 @example | |
| 546 (defun my-make-CR-do-indent () | |
| 547 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)) | |
| 548 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-make-CR-do-indent) | |
| 549 @end example | |
| 550 | |
| 551 @noindent | |
| 552 This example demonstrates the use of a very powerful @ccmode{} (and | |
| 553 Emacs) facility, the hook. The use of @ccmode{}'s hooks is described | |
| 554 in @ref{CC Hooks}. | |
| 555 @end table | |
| 556 | |
| 557 All these settings should occur in your @file{.emacs} @emph{before} | |
| 558 any @ccmode{} buffers get loaded---in particular, before any call of | |
| 559 @code{desktop-read}. | |
| 560 | |
| 561 As you get to know the mode better, you may want to make more | |
| 562 ambitious changes to your configuration. For this, you should start | |
| 563 reading the chapter @ref{Config Basics}. | |
| 564 | |
| 565 If you are upgrading an existing @ccmode{} installation, please see | |
| 566 the @file{README} file for installation details. In particular, if | |
| 567 you are going to be editing AWK files, @file{README} describes how to | |
| 568 configure your (X)Emacs so that @ccmode{} will supersede the obsolete | |
| 569 @code{awk-mode.el} which might have been supplied with your (X)Emacs. | |
| 570 @ccmode{} might not work with older versions of Emacs or XEmacs. See | |
| 571 the @ccmode{} release notes at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net} | |
| 572 for the latest information on Emacs version and package compatibility | |
| 573 (@pxref{Updating CC Mode}). | |
| 574 | |
| 575 @deffn Command c-version | |
| 576 @findex version (c-) | |
| 577 You can find out what version of @ccmode{} you are using by visiting a C | |
| 578 file and entering @kbd{M-x c-version RET}. You should see this message in | |
| 579 the echo area: | |
| 580 | |
| 581 @example | |
| 582 Using CC Mode version 5.XX | |
| 583 @end example | |
| 584 | |
| 585 @noindent | |
| 586 where @samp{XX} is the minor release number. | |
| 587 @end deffn | |
| 588 | |
| 589 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 590 @node Commands, Font Locking, Getting Started, Top | |
| 591 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 592 @chapter Commands | |
| 593 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 594 | |
| 595 This chapter specifies all of CC Mode's commands, and thus contains | |
| 596 nearly everything you need to know to @emph{use} @ccmode{} (as | |
| 597 contrasted with configuring it). @dfn{Commands} here means both | |
| 598 control key sequences and @dfn{electric keys}, these being characters | |
| 599 such as @samp{;} which, as well as inserting themselves into the | |
| 600 buffer, also do other things. | |
| 601 | |
| 602 You might well want to review | |
| 603 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 604 @ref{Lists,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}, | |
| 605 @end ifset | |
| 606 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 607 @ref{Moving by Parens,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}, | |
| 608 @end ifclear | |
| 609 which describes commands for moving around brace and parenthesis | |
| 610 structures. | |
| 611 | |
| 612 | |
| 613 @menu | |
| 614 * Indentation Commands:: | |
| 615 * Comment Commands:: | |
| 616 * Movement Commands:: | |
| 617 * Filling and Breaking:: | |
| 618 * Minor Modes:: | |
| 619 * Electric Keys:: | |
| 620 * Auto-newlines:: | |
| 621 * Hungry WS Deletion:: | |
| 622 * Subword Movement:: | |
| 623 * Other Commands:: | |
| 624 @end menu | |
| 625 | |
| 626 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 627 @node Indentation Commands, Comment Commands, Commands, Commands | |
| 628 @comment node-name, next, previous,up | |
| 629 @section Indentation Commands | |
| 630 @cindex indentation | |
| 631 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 632 | |
| 633 The following commands reindent C constructs. Note that when you | |
| 634 change your coding style, either interactively or through some other | |
| 635 means, your file does @emph{not} automatically get reindented. You | |
| 636 will need to execute one of the following commands to see the effects | |
| 637 of your changes. | |
| 638 | |
| 639 @cindex GNU indent program | |
| 640 Also, variables like @code{c-hanging-*} and @code{c-cleanup-list} | |
| 641 (@pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}) only affect how on-the-fly code is | |
| 642 formatted. Changing the ``hanginess'' of a brace and then | |
| 643 reindenting, will not move the brace to a different line. For this, | |
| 644 you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent}, | |
| 645 which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things. | |
| 646 | |
| 647 Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other | |
| 648 code, i.e. they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the | |
| 649 indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments. | |
| 650 | |
| 651 The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed | |
| 652 syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd | |
| 653 get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no | |
| 654 hint about the syntactic context, i.e. whether the macro expands to an | |
| 655 expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the | |
| 656 syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it | |
| 657 out correctly most of the time, though. | |
| 658 | |
| 659 Reindenting large sections of code can take a long time. When | |
| 660 @ccmode{} reindents a region of code, it is essentially equivalent to | |
| 661 hitting @key{TAB} on every line of the region. | |
| 662 | |
| 663 These commands indent code: | |
| 664 | |
| 665 @table @asis | |
| 666 @item @kbd{@key{TAB}} (@code{c-indent-command}) | |
| 667 @kindex TAB | |
| 668 @findex c-indent-command | |
| 669 @findex indent-command (c-) | |
| 670 This command indents the current line. That is all you need to know | |
| 671 about it for normal use. | |
| 672 | |
| 673 @code{c-indent-command} does different things, depending on the | |
| 674 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine | |
| 675 Basics}): | |
| 676 | |
| 677 @itemize @bullet | |
| 678 @item | |
| 679 When it's non-@code{nil} (which it normally is), the command indents | |
| 680 the line according to its syntactic context. With a prefix argument | |
| 681 (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), it will re-indent the entire | |
| 682 expression@footnote{this is only useful for a line starting with a | |
| 683 comment opener or an opening brace, parenthesis, or string quote.} | |
| 684 that begins at the line's left margin. | |
| 685 | |
| 686 @item | |
| 687 When it's @code{nil}, the command indents the line by an extra | |
| 688 @code{c-basic-offset} columns. A prefix argument acts as a | |
| 689 multiplier. A bare prefix (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}) is equivalent to -1, | |
| 690 removing @code{c-basic-offset} columns from the indentation. | |
| 691 @end itemize | |
| 692 | |
| 693 The precise behavior is modified by several variables: With | |
| 694 @code{c-tab-always-indent}, you can make @key{TAB} insert whitespace | |
| 695 in some circumstances---@code{c-insert-tab-function} then defines | |
| 696 precisely what sort of ``whitespace'' this will be. Set the standard | |
| 697 Emacs variable @code{indent-tabs-mode} to @code{t} if you want real | |
| 698 @samp{tab} characters to be used in the indentation, to @code{nil} if | |
| 699 you want only spaces. @xref{Just Spaces,,, @emacsman{}, | |
| 700 @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 701 | |
| 702 @defopt c-tab-always-indent | |
| 703 @vindex tab-always-indent (c-) | |
| 704 @cindex literal | |
| 705 This variable modifies how @key{TAB} operates. | |
| 706 @itemize @bullet | |
| 707 @item | |
| 708 When it is @code{t} (the default), @key{TAB} simply indents the | |
| 709 current line. | |
| 710 @item | |
| 711 When it is @code{nil}, @key{TAB} (re)indents the line only if point is | |
| 712 to the left of the first non-whitespace character on the line. | |
| 713 Otherwise it inserts some whitespace (a tab or an equivalent number of | |
| 714 spaces - see below) at point. | |
| 715 @item | |
| 716 With some other value, the line is reindented. Additionally, if point | |
| 717 is within a string or comment, some whitespace is inserted. | |
| 718 @end itemize | |
| 719 @end defopt | |
| 720 | |
| 721 @defopt c-insert-tab-function | |
| 722 @vindex insert-tab-function (c-) | |
| 723 @findex tab-to-tab-stop | |
| 724 When ``some whitespace'' is inserted as described above, what actually | |
| 725 happens is that the function stored in @code{c-insert-tab-function} is | |
| 726 called. Normally, this is @code{insert-tab}, which inserts a real tab | |
| 727 character or the equivalent number of spaces (depending on | |
| 728 @code{indent-tabs-mode}). Some people, however, set | |
| 729 @code{c-insert-tab-function} to @code{tab-to-tab-stop} so as to get | |
| 730 hard tab stops when indenting. | |
| 731 @end defopt | |
| 732 @end table | |
| 733 | |
| 734 @noindent | |
| 735 The kind of indentation the next five commands do depends on the | |
| 736 setting of @code{c-syntactic-indentation} (@pxref{Indentation Engine | |
| 737 Basics}): | |
| 738 @itemize @bullet | |
| 739 @item | |
| 740 when it is non-@code{nil} (the default), the commands indent lines | |
| 741 according to their syntactic context; | |
| 742 @item | |
| 743 when it is @code{nil}, they just indent each line the same amount as | |
| 744 the previous non-blank line. The commands that indent a region aren't | |
| 745 very useful in this case. | |
| 746 @end itemize | |
| 747 | |
| 748 @table @asis | |
| 749 @item @kbd{C-j} (@code{newline-and-indent}) | |
| 750 @kindex C-j | |
| 751 @findex newline-and-indent | |
| 752 Inserts a newline and indents the new blank line, ready to start | |
| 753 typing. This is a standard (X)Emacs command. | |
| 754 | |
| 755 @item @kbd{C-M-q} (@code{c-indent-exp}) | |
| 756 @kindex C-M-q | |
| 757 @findex c-indent-exp | |
| 758 @findex indent-exp (c-) | |
| 759 Indents an entire balanced brace or parenthesis expression. Note that | |
| 760 point must be on the opening brace or parenthesis of the expression | |
| 761 you want to indent. | |
| 762 | |
| 763 @item @kbd{C-c C-q} (@code{c-indent-defun}) | |
| 764 @kindex C-c C-q | |
| 765 @findex c-indent-defun | |
| 766 @findex indent-defun (c-) | |
| 767 Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition | |
| 768 encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be | |
| 769 used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or | |
| 770 function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented | |
| 771 must be complete, i.e. it must have both a beginning brace and an ending | |
| 772 brace. | |
| 773 | |
| 774 @item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region}) | |
| 775 @kindex C-M-\ | |
| 776 @findex indent-region | |
| 777 Indents an arbitrary region of code. This is a standard Emacs command, | |
| 778 tailored for C code in a @ccmode{} buffer. Note, of course, that point | |
| 779 and mark must delineate the region you want to indent. | |
| 780 | |
| 781 @item @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{c-mark-function}) | |
| 782 @kindex C-M-h | |
| 783 @findex c-mark-function | |
| 784 @findex mark-function (c-) | |
| 785 While not strictly an indentation command, this is useful for marking | |
| 786 the current top-level function or class definition as the current | |
| 787 region. As with @code{c-indent-defun}, this command operates on | |
| 788 top-level constructs, and can't be used to mark say, a Java method. | |
| 789 @end table | |
| 790 | |
| 791 These variables are also useful when indenting code: | |
| 792 | |
| 793 @defopt indent-tabs-mode | |
| 794 This is a standard Emacs variable that controls how line indentation | |
| 795 is composed. When it's non-@code{nil}, tabs can be used in a line's | |
| 796 indentation, otherwise only spaces are used. | |
| 797 @end defopt | |
| 798 | |
| 799 @defopt c-progress-interval | |
| 800 @vindex progress-interval (c-) | |
| 801 When indenting large regions of code, this variable controls how often a | |
| 802 progress message is displayed. Set this variable to @code{nil} to | |
| 803 inhibit the progress messages, or set it to an integer which is how | |
| 804 often (in seconds) progress messages are to be displayed. | |
| 805 @end defopt | |
| 806 | |
| 807 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 808 @node Comment Commands, Movement Commands, Indentation Commands, Commands | |
| 809 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 810 @section Comment Commands | |
| 811 @cindex comments (insertion of) | |
| 812 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 813 | |
| 814 @table @asis | |
| 815 @item @kbd{C-c C-c} (@code{comment-region}) | |
| 816 @kindex C-c C-c | |
| 817 @findex comment-region | |
| 818 This command comments out the lines that start in the region. With a | |
| 819 negative argument, it does the opposite - it deletes the comment | |
| 820 delimiters from these lines. @xref{Multi-Line Comments,,, emacs, GNU | |
| 821 Emacs Manual}, for fuller details. @code{comment-region} isn't | |
| 822 actually part of @ccmode{} - it is given a @ccmode{} binding for | |
| 823 convenience. | |
| 824 | |
| 825 @item @kbd{M-;} (@code{comment-dwim} or @code{indent-for-comment} @footnote{The name of this command varies between (X)Emacs versions.}) | |
| 826 @kindex M-; | |
| 827 @findex comment-dwim | |
| 828 @findex indent-for-comment | |
| 829 Insert a comment at the end of the current line, if none is there | |
| 830 already. Then reindent the comment according to @code{comment-column} | |
| 831 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 832 (@pxref{Options for Comments,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}) | |
| 833 @end ifclear | |
| 834 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 835 (@pxref{Comments,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}) | |
| 836 @end ifset | |
| 837 and the variables below. Finally, position the point after the | |
| 838 comment starter. @kbd{C-u M-;} kills any comment on the current line, | |
| 839 together with any whitespace before it. This is a standard Emacs | |
| 840 command, but @ccmode{} enhances it a bit with two variables: | |
| 841 | |
| 842 @defopt c-indent-comment-alist | |
| 843 @vindex indent-comment-alist (c-) | |
| 844 @vindex comment-column | |
| 845 This style variable allows you to vary the column that @kbd{M-;} puts | |
| 846 the comment at, depending on what sort of code is on the line, and | |
| 847 possibly the indentation of any similar comment on the preceding line. | |
| 848 It is an association list that maps different types of lines to | |
| 849 actions describing how they should be handled. If a certain line type | |
| 850 isn't present on the list then the line is indented to the column | |
| 851 specified by @code{comment-column}. | |
| 852 | |
| 853 See the documentation string for a full description of this | |
| 854 variable (use @kbd{C-h v c-indent-comment-alist}). | |
| 855 @end defopt | |
| 856 | |
| 857 @defopt c-indent-comments-syntactically-p | |
| 858 @vindex indent-comments-syntactically-p (c-) | |
| 859 Normally, when this style variable is @code{nil}, @kbd{M-;} will | |
| 860 indent comment-only lines according to @code{c-indent-comment-alist}, | |
| 861 just as it does with lines where other code precede the comments. | |
| 862 However, if you want it to act just like @key{TAB} for comment-only | |
| 863 lines you can get that by setting | |
| 864 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} to non-@code{nil}. | |
| 865 | |
| 866 If @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} is non-@code{nil} then | |
| 867 @code{c-indent-comment-alist} won't be consulted at all for comment-only | |
| 868 lines. | |
| 869 @end defopt | |
| 870 @end table | |
| 871 | |
| 872 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 873 @node Movement Commands, Filling and Breaking, Comment Commands, Commands | |
| 874 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 875 @section Movement Commands | |
| 876 @cindex movement | |
| 877 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 878 | |
| 879 @ccmode{} contains some useful commands for moving around in C code. | |
| 880 | |
| 881 @table @asis | |
| 882 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-defun}) | |
| 883 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (@code{c-end-of-defun}) | |
| 884 @findex c-beginning-of-defun | |
| 885 @findex c-end-of-defun | |
| 886 | |
| 887 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next function. Other | |
| 888 constructs (such as a structs or classes) which have a brace block | |
| 889 also count as ``functions'' here. To move over several functions, you | |
| 890 can give these commands a repeat count. | |
| 891 | |
| 892 The start of a function is at its header. The end of the function is | |
| 893 after its closing brace, or after the semicolon of a construct (such | |
| 894 as a @code{struct}) which doesn't end at the brace. These two | |
| 895 commands try to leave point at the beginning of a line near the actual | |
| 896 start or end of the function. This occasionally causes point not to | |
| 897 move at all. | |
| 898 | |
| 899 These functions are analogous to the Emacs built-in commands | |
| 900 @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}, except they | |
| 901 eliminate the constraint that the top-level opening brace of the defun | |
| 902 must be in column zero. See @ref{Defuns,,,@emacsman{}, | |
| 903 @emacsmantitle{}}, for more information. | |
| 904 | |
| 905 @item @kbd{C-M-a} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-beginning-of-defun}) | |
| 906 @itemx @kbd{C-M-e} (AWK Mode) (@code{c-awk-end-of-defun}) | |
| 907 @kindex C-M-a (AWK Mode) | |
| 908 @kindex C-M-e (AWK Mode) | |
| 909 @findex c-awk-beginning-of-defun | |
| 910 @findex awk-beginning-of-defun (c-) | |
| 911 @findex c-awk-end-of-defun | |
| 912 @findex awk-end-of-defun (c-) | |
| 913 Move to the beginning or end of the current or next AWK defun. These | |
| 914 commands can take prefix-arguments, their functionality being entirely | |
| 915 equivalent to @code{beginning-of-defun} and @code{end-of-defun}. | |
| 916 | |
| 917 AWK Mode @dfn{defuns} are either pattern/action pairs (either of which | |
| 918 might be implicit) or user defined functions. Having the @samp{@{} and | |
| 919 @samp{@}} (if there are any) in column zero, as is suggested for some | |
| 920 modes, is neither necessary nor helpful in AWK mode. | |
| 921 | |
| 922 @item @kbd{M-a} (@code{c-beginning-of-statement}) | |
| 923 @itemx @kbd{M-e} (@code{c-end-of-statement}) | |
| 924 @kindex M-a | |
| 925 @kindex M-e | |
| 926 @findex c-beginning-of-statement | |
| 927 @findex c-end-of-statement | |
| 928 @findex beginning-of-statement (c-) | |
| 929 @findex end-of-statement (c-) | |
| 930 Move to the beginning or end of the innermost C statement. If point | |
| 931 is already there, move to the next beginning or end of a statement, | |
| 932 even if that means moving into a block. (Use @kbd{C-M-b} or | |
| 933 @kbd{C-M-f} to move over a balanced block.) A prefix argument @var{n} | |
| 934 means move over @var{n} statements. | |
| 935 | |
| 936 If point is within or next to a comment or a string which spans more | |
| 937 than one line, these commands move by sentences instead of statements. | |
| 938 | |
| 939 When called from a program, these functions take three optional | |
| 940 arguments: the repetition count, a buffer position limit which is the | |
| 941 farthest back to search for the syntactic context, and a flag saying | |
| 942 whether to do sentence motion in or near comments and multiline | |
| 943 strings. | |
| 944 | |
| 945 @item @kbd{C-c C-u} (@code{c-up-conditional}) | |
| 946 @kindex C-c C-u | |
| 947 @findex c-up-conditional | |
| 948 @findex up-conditional (c-) | |
| 949 Move back to the containing preprocessor conditional, leaving the mark | |
| 950 behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a negative | |
| 951 argument, move forward to the end of the containing preprocessor | |
| 952 conditional. | |
| 953 | |
| 954 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the | |
| 955 function stops at them when going backward, but not when going | |
| 956 forward. | |
| 957 | |
| 958 This key sequence is not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have | |
| 959 preprocessor statements. | |
| 960 | |
| 961 @item @kbd{M-x c-up-conditional-with-else} | |
| 962 @findex c-up-conditional-with-else | |
| 963 @findex up-conditional-with-else (c-) | |
| 964 A variety of @code{c-up-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else} | |
| 965 lines. Normally those lines are ignored. | |
| 966 | |
| 967 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional} | |
| 968 @findex c-down-conditional | |
| 969 @findex down-conditional (c-) | |
| 970 Move forward into the next nested preprocessor conditional, leaving | |
| 971 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a | |
| 972 negative argument, move backward into the previous nested preprocessor | |
| 973 conditional. | |
| 974 | |
| 975 @samp{#elif} is treated like @samp{#else} followed by @samp{#if}, so the | |
| 976 function stops at them when going forward, but not when going backward. | |
| 977 | |
| 978 @item @kbd{M-x c-down-conditional-with-else} | |
| 979 @findex c-down-conditional-with-else | |
| 980 @findex down-conditional-with-else (c-) | |
| 981 A variety of @code{c-down-conditional} that also stops at @samp{#else} | |
| 982 lines. Normally those lines are ignored. | |
| 983 | |
| 984 @item @kbd{C-c C-p} (@code{c-backward-conditional}) | |
| 985 @itemx @kbd{C-c C-n} (@code{c-forward-conditional}) | |
| 986 @kindex C-c C-p | |
| 987 @kindex C-c C-n | |
| 988 @findex c-backward-conditional | |
| 989 @findex c-forward-conditional | |
| 990 @findex backward-conditional (c-) | |
| 991 @findex forward-conditional (c-) | |
| 992 Move backward or forward across a preprocessor conditional, leaving | |
| 993 the mark behind. A prefix argument acts as a repeat count. With a | |
| 994 negative argument, move in the opposite direction. | |
| 995 | |
| 996 These key sequences are not bound in AWK Mode, which doesn't have | |
| 997 preprocessor statements. | |
| 998 | |
| 999 @item @kbd{M-x c-backward-into-nomenclature} | |
| 1000 @itemx @kbd{M-x c-forward-into-nomenclature} | |
| 1001 @findex c-backward-into-nomenclature | |
| 1002 @findex c-forward-into-nomenclature | |
| 1003 @findex backward-into-nomenclature (c-) | |
| 1004 @findex forward-into-nomenclature (c-) | |
| 1005 A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages | |
| 1006 such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the | |
| 1007 first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by | |
| 1008 underscores. E.g. @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}. | |
| 1009 | |
| 1010 These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next | |
| 1011 capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times. | |
| 1012 If @var{n} is negative, move in the opposite direction. | |
| 1013 | |
| 1014 Note that these two commands have been superseded by | |
|
106980
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1015 @code{subword-mode}, which you should use instead. @xref{Subword |
| 84286 | 1016 Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}. |
| 1017 @end table | |
| 1018 | |
| 1019 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1020 @node Filling and Breaking, Minor Modes, Movement Commands, Commands | |
| 1021 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1022 @section Filling and Line Breaking Commands | |
| 1023 @cindex text filling | |
| 1024 @cindex line breaking | |
| 1025 @cindex comment handling | |
| 1026 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1027 | |
| 1028 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals, | |
| 1029 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal | |
| 1030 is to do it seamlessly, i.e. you can use auto fill mode, sentence and | |
| 1031 paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever | |
| 1032 there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it. | |
| 1033 @ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes, | |
| 1034 and so on. | |
| 1035 | |
| 1036 You can configure the exact way comments get filled and broken, and | |
| 1037 where Emacs does auto-filling (see @pxref{Custom Filling and | |
| 1038 Breaking}). Typically, the style system (@pxref{Styles}) will have | |
| 1039 set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother. | |
| 1040 | |
| 1041 @findex auto-fill-mode | |
| 1042 @cindex Auto Fill mode | |
| 1043 @cindex paragraph filling | |
| 1044 Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of | |
| 1045 whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto Fill,,, | |
| 1046 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g. with | |
| 1047 @kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In | |
| 1048 string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the | |
| 1049 previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by | |
| 1050 setting the @code{string} syntactic symbol (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols} | |
| 1051 and @pxref{Customizing Indentation})}. | |
| 1052 | |
| 1053 @table @asis | |
| 1054 @item @kbd{M-q} (@code{c-fill-paragraph}) | |
| 1055 @kindex M-q | |
| 1056 @findex c-fill-paragraph | |
| 1057 @findex fill-paragraph (c-) | |
| 1058 @cindex Javadoc markup | |
| 1059 @cindex Pike autodoc markup | |
| 1060 This command fills multiline string literals and both block | |
| 1061 and line style comments. In Java buffers, the Javadoc markup words | |
| 1062 are recognized as paragraph starters. The line oriented Pike autodoc | |
| 1063 markup words are recognized in the same way in Pike mode. | |
| 1064 | |
| 1065 The formatting of the starters (@code{/*}) and enders (@code{*/}) of | |
| 1066 block comments are kept as they were before the filling. I.e., if | |
| 1067 either the starter or ender were on a line of its own, then it stays | |
| 1068 on its own line; conversely, if the delimiter has comment text on its | |
| 1069 line, it keeps at least one word of that text with it on the line. | |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 This command is the replacement for @code{fill-paragraph} in @ccmode{} | |
| 1072 buffers. | |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 @item @kbd{M-j} (@code{c-indent-new-comment-line}) | |
| 1075 @kindex M-j | |
| 1076 @findex c-indent-new-comment-line | |
| 1077 @findex indent-new-comment-line (c-) | |
| 1078 This breaks the current line at point and indents the new line. If | |
| 1079 point was in a comment, the new line gets the proper comment line | |
| 1080 prefix. If point was inside a macro, a backslash is inserted before | |
| 1081 the line break. It is the replacement for | |
| 1082 @code{indent-new-comment-line}. | |
| 1083 | |
| 1084 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-line-break} | |
| 1085 @findex c-context-line-break | |
| 1086 @findex context-line-break (c-) | |
| 1087 Insert a line break suitable to the context: If the point is inside a | |
| 1088 comment, the new line gets the suitable indentation and comment line | |
| 1089 prefix like @code{c-indent-new-comment-line}. In normal code it's | |
| 1090 indented like @code{newline-and-indent} would do. In macros it acts | |
| 1091 like @code{newline-and-indent} but additionally inserts and optionally | |
| 1092 aligns the line ending backslash so that the macro remains unbroken. | |
| 1093 @xref{Custom Macros}, for details about the backslash alignment. In a | |
| 1094 string, a backslash is inserted only if the string is within a | |
| 1095 macro@footnote{In GCC, unescaped line breaks within strings are | |
| 1096 valid.}. | |
| 1097 | |
| 1098 This function is not bound to a key by default, but it's intended to be | |
| 1099 used on the @kbd{RET} key. If you like the behavior of | |
| 1100 @code{newline-and-indent} on @kbd{RET}, you should consider switching to | |
| 1101 this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 @item @kbd{M-x c-context-open-line} | |
| 1104 @findex c-context-open-line | |
| 1105 @findex context-open-line (c-) | |
| 1106 This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as | |
| 1107 @code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e. it works just like | |
| 1108 @code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted | |
| 1109 line break. | |
| 1110 @end table | |
| 1111 | |
| 1112 | |
| 1113 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1114 @node Minor Modes, Electric Keys, Filling and Breaking, Commands | |
| 1115 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1116 @section Minor Modes | |
| 1117 @cindex Minor Modes | |
| 1118 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 @ccmode{} contains several minor-mode-like features that you might | |
| 1121 find useful while writing new code or editing old code: | |
| 1122 | |
| 1123 @table @asis | |
| 1124 @item electric mode | |
| 1125 When this is enabled, certain visible characters cause reformatting as | |
| 1126 they are typed. This is normally helpful, but can be a nuisance when | |
| 1127 editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting, | |
| 1128 especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}. | |
| 1129 @item auto-newline mode | |
| 1130 This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type | |
| 1131 them yourself, e.g. after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed | |
| 1132 when electric mode is disabled. | |
| 1133 @item hungry-delete mode | |
| 1134 This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single | |
| 1135 key - for example, the newline and indentation just inserted by | |
| 1136 auto-newline when you want to back up and write a comment after the | |
| 1137 last statement. | |
| 1138 @item subword mode | |
| 1139 This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f} | |
| 1140 (@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the | |
| 1141 parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words. | |
| 1142 E.g. @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS}, | |
| 1143 @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}. | |
| 1144 @item syntactic-indentation mode | |
| 1145 When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such | |
| 1146 as @kbd{C-j} indent lines of code according to their syntactic | |
| 1147 structure. Otherwise, a line is simply indented to the same level as | |
| 1148 the previous one and @kbd{@key{TAB}} adjusts the indentation in steps | |
| 1149 of `c-basic-offset'. | |
| 1150 @end table | |
| 1151 | |
| 1152 Full details on how these minor modes work are at @ref{Electric Keys}, | |
| 1153 @ref{Auto-newlines}, @ref{Hungry WS Deletion}, @ref{Subword Movement}, | |
| 1154 and @ref{Indentation Engine Basics}. | |
| 1155 | |
| 1156 You can toggle each of these minor modes on and off, and you can | |
| 1157 configure @ccmode{} so that it starts up with your favourite | |
| 1158 combination of them (@pxref{Sample .emacs File}). By default, when | |
| 1159 you initialize a buffer, electric mode and syntactic-indentation mode | |
| 1160 are enabled but the other two modes are disabled. | |
| 1161 | |
| 1162 @ccmode{} displays the current state of the first four of these minor | |
| 1163 modes on the modeline by appending letters to the major mode's name, | |
| 1164 one letter for each enabled minor mode - @samp{l} for electric mode, | |
| 1165 @samp{a} for auto-newline mode, @samp{h} for hungry delete mode, and | |
| 1166 @samp{w} for subword mode. If all these modes were enabled, you'd see | |
| 1167 @samp{C/lahw}@footnote{The @samp{C} would be replaced with the name of | |
| 1168 the language in question for the other languages @ccmode{} supports.}. | |
| 1169 | |
| 1170 Here are the commands to toggle these modes: | |
| 1171 | |
| 1172 @table @asis | |
| 1173 @item @kbd{C-c C-l} (@code{c-toggle-electric-state}) | |
| 1174 @kindex C-c C-l | |
| 1175 @findex c-toggle-electric-state | |
| 1176 @findex toggle-electric-state (c-) | |
| 1177 Toggle electric minor mode. When the command turns the mode off, it | |
| 1178 also suppresses auto-newline mode. | |
| 1179 | |
| 1180 @item @kbd{C-c C-a} (@code{c-toggle-auto-newline}) | |
| 1181 @kindex C-c C-a | |
| 1182 @findex c-toggle-auto-newline | |
| 1183 @findex toggle-auto-newline (c-) | |
| 1184 Toggle auto-newline minor mode. When the command turns the mode on, | |
| 1185 it also enables electric minor mode. | |
| 1186 | |
| 1187 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}.} | |
| 1188 @findex c-toggle-hungry-state | |
| 1189 @findex toggle-hungry-state (c-) | |
| 1190 Toggle hungry-delete minor mode. | |
| 1191 | |
| 1192 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command was bound to @kbd{C-c C-t}.} | |
| 1193 @findex c-toggle-auto-hungry-state | |
| 1194 @findex toggle-auto-hungry-state (c-) | |
| 1195 Toggle both auto-newline and hungry delete minor modes. | |
| 1196 | |
|
106980
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1197 @item @kbd{C-c C-w} (@code{M-x subword-mode}) |
| 84286 | 1198 @kindex C-c C-w |
|
106980
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1199 @findex subword-mode |
| 84286 | 1200 Toggle subword mode. |
| 1201 | |
| 1202 @item @kbd{M-x c-toggle-syntactic-indentation} | |
| 1203 @findex c-toggle-syntactic-indentation | |
| 1204 @findex toggle-syntactic-indentation (c-) | |
| 1205 Toggle syntactic-indentation mode. | |
| 1206 @end table | |
| 1207 | |
| 1208 Common to all the toggle functions above is that if they are called | |
| 1209 programmatically, they take an optional numerical argument. A | |
| 1210 positive value will turn on the minor mode (or both of them in the | |
| 1211 case of @code{c-toggle-auto-hungry-state}) and a negative value will | |
| 1212 turn it (or them) off. | |
| 1213 | |
| 1214 | |
| 1215 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1216 @node Electric Keys, Auto-newlines, Minor Modes, Commands | |
| 1217 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1218 @section Electric Keys and Keywords | |
| 1219 @cindex electric characters | |
| 1220 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 Most punctuation keys provide @dfn{electric} behavior - as well as | |
| 1223 inserting themselves they perform some other action, such as | |
| 1224 reindenting the line. This reindentation saves you from having to | |
| 1225 reindent a line manually after typing, say, a @samp{@}}. A few | |
| 1226 keywords, such as @code{else}, also trigger electric action. | |
| 1227 | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
1228 You can inhibit the electric behavior described here by disabling |
| 84286 | 1229 electric minor mode (@pxref{Minor Modes}). |
| 1230 | |
| 1231 Common to all these keys is that they only behave electrically when | |
| 1232 used in normal code (as contrasted with getting typed in a string | |
| 1233 literal or comment). Those which cause re-indentation do so only when | |
| 1234 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} has a non-@code{nil} value (which it | |
| 1235 does by default). | |
| 1236 | |
| 1237 These keys and keywords are: | |
| 1238 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: c-electric-pound doesn't check c-s-i: this is more | |
| 1239 @c like a bug in the code than a bug in this document. It'll get | |
| 1240 @c fixed in the code sometime. | |
| 1241 | |
| 1242 @table @kbd | |
| 1243 @item # | |
| 1244 @kindex # | |
| 1245 @findex c-electric-pound | |
| 1246 @findex electric-pound (c-) | |
| 1247 @vindex c-electric-pound-behavior | |
| 1248 @vindex electric-pound-behavior (c-) | |
| 1249 Pound (bound to @code{c-electric-pound}) is electric when typed as the | |
| 1250 first non-whitespace character on a line and not within a macro | |
| 1251 definition. In this case, the variable @code{c-electric-pound-behavior} | |
| 1252 is consulted for the electric behavior. This variable takes a list | |
| 1253 value, although the only element currently defined is @code{alignleft}, | |
| 1254 which tells this command to force the @samp{#} character into column | |
| 1255 zero. This is useful for entering preprocessor macro definitions. | |
| 1256 | |
| 1257 Pound is not electric in AWK buffers, where @samp{#} starts a comment, | |
| 1258 and is bound to @code{self-insert-command} like any typical printable | |
| 1259 character. | |
| 1260 @c ACM, 2004/8/24: Change this (and the code) to do AWK comment | |
| 1261 @c reindentation. | |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 @item * | |
| 1264 @kindex * | |
| 1265 @itemx / | |
| 1266 @kindex / | |
| 1267 @findex c-electric-star | |
| 1268 @findex electric-star (c-) | |
| 1269 @findex c-electric-slash | |
| 1270 @findex electric-slash (c-) | |
| 1271 A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash | |
| 1272 (@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the | |
| 1273 second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a | |
| 1274 C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the | |
| 1275 comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e. there's only | |
| 1276 whitespace before it). | |
| 1277 | |
| 1278 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at | |
| 1279 the start of a line within a block comment will terminate the | |
| 1280 comment. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to get | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
1281 this behavior. @xref{Clean-ups}. |
| 84286 | 1282 |
| 1283 In AWK mode, @samp{*} and @samp{/} do not delimit comments and are not | |
| 1284 electric. | |
| 1285 | |
| 1286 @item < | |
| 1287 @kindex < | |
| 1288 @itemx > | |
| 1289 @kindex > | |
| 1290 @findex c-electric-lt-gt | |
| 1291 @findex electric-lt-gt (c-) | |
| 1292 A less-than or greater-than sign (bound to @code{c-electric-lt-gt}) is | |
| 1293 electric in two circumstances: when it is an angle bracket in a C++ | |
| 1294 @samp{template} declaration (and similar constructs in other | |
| 1295 languages) and when it is the second of two @kbd{<} or @kbd{>} | |
| 1296 characters in a C++ style stream operator. In either case, the line | |
| 1297 is reindented. Angle brackets in C @samp{#include} directives are not | |
| 1298 electric. | |
| 1299 | |
| 1300 @item ( | |
| 1301 @kindex ( | |
| 1302 @itemx ) | |
| 1303 @kindex ) | |
| 1304 @findex c-electric-paren | |
| 1305 @findex electric-paren (c-) | |
| 1306 The normal parenthesis characters @samp{(} and @samp{)} (bound to | |
| 1307 @code{c-electric-paren}) reindent the current line. This is useful | |
| 1308 for getting the closing parenthesis of an argument list aligned | |
| 1309 automatically. | |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 You can also configure @ccmode{} to insert a space automatically | |
| 1312 between a function name and the @samp{(} you've just typed, and to | |
| 1313 remove it automatically after typing @samp{)}, should the argument | |
| 1314 list be empty. You don't need to have electric minor mode enabled to | |
| 1315 get these actions. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 @item @{ | |
| 1318 @kindex @{ | |
| 1319 @itemx @} | |
| 1320 @kindex @} | |
| 1321 @findex c-electric-brace | |
| 1322 @findex electric-brace (c-) | |
| 1323 Typing a brace (bound to @code{c-electric-brace}) reindents the | |
| 1324 current line. Also, one or more newlines might be inserted if | |
| 1325 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. | |
| 1326 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} to compact excess whitespace | |
| 1327 inserted by auto-newline mode in certain circumstances. | |
| 1328 @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1329 | |
| 1330 @item : | |
| 1331 @kindex : | |
| 1332 @findex c-electric-colon | |
| 1333 @findex electric-colon (c-) | |
| 1334 Typing a colon (bound to @code{c-electric-colon}) reindents the | |
| 1335 current line. Additionally, one or more newlines might be inserted if | |
| 1336 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. If you | |
| 1337 type a second colon immediately after such an auto-newline, by default | |
| 1338 the whitespace between the two colons is removed, leaving a C++ scope | |
| 1339 operator. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1340 | |
| 1341 If you prefer, you can insert @samp{::} in a single operation, | |
| 1342 avoiding all these spurious reindentations, newlines, and clean-ups. | |
| 1343 @xref{Other Commands}. | |
| 1344 | |
| 1345 @item ; | |
| 1346 @kindex ; | |
| 1347 @itemx , | |
| 1348 @kindex , | |
| 1349 @findex c-electric-semi&comma | |
| 1350 @findex electric-semi&comma (c-) | |
| 1351 Typing a semicolon or comma (bound to @code{c-electric-semi&comma}) | |
| 1352 reindents the current line. Also, a newline might be inserted if | |
| 1353 auto-newline minor mode is enabled. @xref{Auto-newlines}. | |
| 1354 Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that when auto-newline | |
| 1355 has inserted whitespace after a @samp{@}}, it will be removed again | |
| 1356 when you type a semicolon or comma just after it. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 1357 | |
| 1358 @end table | |
| 1359 | |
| 1360 @deffn Command c-electric-continued-statement | |
| 1361 @findex electric-continued-statement (c-) | |
| 1362 | |
| 1363 Certain keywords are electric, causing reindentation when they are | |
| 1364 preceded only by whitespace on the line. The keywords are those that | |
| 1365 continue an earlier statement instead of starting a new one: | |
| 1366 @code{else}, @code{while}, @code{catch} (only in C++ and Java) and | |
| 1367 @code{finally} (only in Java). | |
| 1368 | |
| 1369 An example: | |
| 1370 | |
| 1371 @example | |
| 1372 @group | |
| 1373 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) | |
| 1374 if (a[i]) | |
| 1375 res += a[i]->offset; | |
| 1376 else | |
| 1377 @end group | |
| 1378 @end example | |
| 1379 | |
| 1380 Here, the @code{else} should be indented like the preceding @code{if}, | |
| 1381 since it continues that statement. @ccmode{} will automatically | |
| 1382 reindent it after the @code{else} has been typed in full, since only | |
| 1383 then is it possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a | |
| 1384 continuation of the preceding @code{if}. | |
| 1385 | |
| 1386 @vindex abbrev-mode | |
| 1387 @findex abbrev-mode | |
| 1388 @cindex Abbrev mode | |
| 1389 @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,, @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}) | |
| 1390 to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language | |
| 1391 modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements. | |
| 1392 @end deffn | |
| 1393 | |
| 1394 | |
| 1395 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1396 @node Auto-newlines, Hungry WS Deletion, Electric Keys, Commands | |
| 1397 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1398 @section Auto-newline Insertion | |
| 1399 @cindex auto-newline | |
| 1400 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1401 | |
| 1402 When you have @dfn{Auto-newline minor mode} enabled (@pxref{Minor | |
| 1403 Modes}), @ccmode{} inserts newlines for you automatically (in certain | |
| 1404 syntactic contexts) when you type a left or right brace, a colon, a | |
| 1405 semicolon, or a comma. Sometimes a newline appears before the | |
| 1406 character you type, sometimes after it, sometimes both. | |
| 1407 | |
| 1408 Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold: | |
| 1409 | |
| 1410 @itemize @bullet | |
| 1411 @item | |
| 1412 Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator | |
| 1413 @samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g. @samp{C/a} or | |
| 1414 @samp{C/la}). | |
| 1415 | |
| 1416 @item | |
| 1417 The character was typed at the end of a line, or with only whitespace | |
| 1418 after it, and possibly a @samp{\} escaping the newline. | |
| 1419 | |
| 1420 @item | |
| 1421 The character is not on its own line already. (This applies only to | |
| 1422 insertion of a newline @emph{before} the character.) | |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 @item | |
| 1425 @cindex literal | |
| 1426 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 1427 The character was not typed inside of a literal @footnote{A | |
| 1428 @dfn{literal} is defined as any comment, string, or preprocessor macro | |
| 1429 definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic | |
| 1430 whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}. | |
| 1431 | |
| 1432 @item | |
| 1433 No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e. it was typed as | |
| 1434 normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix). | |
| 1435 @end itemize | |
| 1436 | |
| 1437 You can configure the precise circumstances in which newlines get | |
| 1438 inserted (see @pxref{Custom Auto-newlines}). Typically, the style | |
| 1439 system (@pxref{Styles}) will have set this up for you, so you probably | |
| 1440 won't have to bother. | |
| 1441 | |
| 1442 Sometimes @ccmode{} inserts an auto-newline where you don't want one, | |
| 1443 such as after a @samp{@}} when you're about to type a @samp{;}. | |
| 1444 Hungry deletion can help here (@pxref{Hungry WS Deletion}), or you can | |
| 1445 activate an appropriate @dfn{clean-up}, which will remove the excess | |
| 1446 whitespace after you've typed the @samp{;}. See @ref{Clean-ups} for a | |
| 1447 full description. See also @ref{Electric Keys} for a summary of | |
| 1448 clean-ups listed by key. | |
| 1449 | |
| 1450 | |
| 1451 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1452 @node Hungry WS Deletion, Subword Movement, Auto-newlines, Commands | |
| 1453 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1454 @section Hungry Deletion of Whitespace | |
| 1455 @cindex hungry-deletion | |
| 1456 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1457 | |
| 1458 If you want to delete an entire block of whitespace at point, you can | |
| 1459 use @dfn{hungry deletion}. This deletes all the contiguous whitespace | |
| 1460 either before point or after point in a single operation. | |
| 1461 ``Whitespace'' here includes tabs and newlines, but not comments or | |
| 1462 preprocessor commands. Hungry deletion can markedly cut down on the | |
| 1463 number of times you have to hit deletion keys when, for example, | |
| 1464 you've made a mistake on the preceding line and have already pressed | |
| 1465 @kbd{C-j}. | |
| 1466 | |
| 1467 Hungry deletion is a simple feature that some people find extremely | |
| 1468 useful. In fact, you might find yourself wanting it in @strong{all} | |
| 1469 your editing modes! | |
| 1470 | |
| 1471 Loosely speaking, in what follows, @dfn{@key{DEL}} means ``the | |
| 1472 backspace key'' and @dfn{@key{DELETE}} means ``the forward delete | |
| 1473 key''. This is discussed in more detail below. | |
| 1474 | |
| 1475 There are two different ways you can use hungry deletion: | |
| 1476 | |
| 1477 @table @asis | |
| 1478 @item Using @dfn{Hungry Delete Mode} with @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} | |
| 1479 Here you toggle Hungry Delete minor mode with @kbd{M-x | |
| 1480 c-toggle-hungry-state}@footnote{Prior to @ccmode{} 5.31, this command | |
| 1481 was bound to @kbd{C-c C-d}. @kbd{C-c C-d} is now the default binding | |
| 1482 for @code{c-hungry-delete-forward}.} (@pxref{Minor Modes}.) This | |
| 1483 makes @kbd{@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-d} do backwards and forward hungry | |
| 1484 deletion. | |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 @table @asis | |
| 1487 @item @kbd{@key{DEL}} (@code{c-electric-backspace}) | |
| 1488 @kindex DEL | |
| 1489 @findex c-electric-backspace | |
| 1490 @findex electric-backspace (c-) | |
| 1491 This command is run by default when you hit the @kbd{DEL} key. When | |
| 1492 hungry delete mode is enabled, it deletes any amount of whitespace in | |
| 1493 the backwards direction. Otherwise, or when used with a prefix | |
| 1494 argument or in a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}), the command just | |
| 1495 deletes backwards in the usual way. (More precisely, it calls the | |
| 1496 function contained in the variable @code{c-backspace-function}, | |
| 1497 passing it the prefix argument, if any.) | |
| 1498 | |
| 1499 @item @code{c-backspace-function} | |
| 1500 @vindex c-backspace-function | |
| 1501 @vindex backspace-function (c-) | |
| 1502 @findex backward-delete-char-untabify | |
| 1503 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-backspace} when it doesn't | |
| 1504 do an ``electric'' deletion of the preceding whitespace. The default | |
| 1505 value is @code{backward-delete-char-untabify} | |
| 1506 (@pxref{Deletion,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}, the function which | |
| 1507 deletes a single character. | |
| 1508 | |
| 1509 @item @kbd{C-d} (@code{c-electric-delete-forward}) | |
| 1510 @kindex C-d | |
| 1511 @findex c-electric-delete-forward | |
| 1512 @findex electric-delete-forward (c-) | |
| 1513 This function, which is bound to @kbd{C-d} by default, works just like | |
| 1514 @code{c-electric-backspace} but in the forward direction. When it | |
| 1515 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace, it | |
| 1516 just does @code{delete-char}, more or less. (Strictly speaking, it | |
| 1517 calls the function in @code{c-delete-function} with the prefix | |
| 1518 argument.) | |
| 1519 | |
| 1520 @item @code{c-delete-function} | |
| 1521 @vindex c-delete-function | |
| 1522 @vindex delete-function (c-) | |
| 1523 @findex delete-char | |
| 1524 Hook that gets called by @code{c-electric-delete-forward} when it | |
| 1525 doesn't do an ``electric'' deletion of the following whitespace. The | |
| 1526 default value is @code{delete-char}. | |
| 1527 @end table | |
| 1528 | |
| 1529 @item Using Distinct Bindings | |
| 1530 The other (newer and recommended) way to use hungry deletion is to | |
| 1531 perform @code{c-hungry-delete-backwards} and | |
| 1532 @code{c-hungry-delete-forward} directly through their key sequences | |
| 1533 rather than using the minor mode toggling. | |
| 1534 | |
| 1535 @table @asis | |
| 1536 @item @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-backwards})@footnote{This command was formerly known as @code{c-hungry-backspace}.} | |
| 1537 @kindex C-c C-<backspace> | |
| 1538 @kindex C-c <backspace> | |
| 1539 @kindex C-c C-DEL | |
| 1540 @kindex C-c DEL | |
| 1541 @findex c-hungry-delete-backwards | |
| 1542 @findex hungry-delete-backwards (c-) | |
| 1543 Delete any amount of whitespace in the backwards direction (regardless | |
| 1544 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound | |
| 1545 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DEL}}, since the more | |
| 1546 natural one, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DEL}}, is sometimes difficult to type at | |
| 1547 a character terminal. | |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 @item @kbd{C-c C-d}, @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}}, or @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} (@code{c-hungry-delete-forward}) | |
| 1550 @kindex C-c C-d | |
| 1551 @kindex C-c C-<DELETE> | |
| 1552 @kindex C-c <DELETE> | |
| 1553 @findex c-hungry-delete-forward | |
| 1554 @findex hungry-delete-forward (c-) | |
| 1555 Delete any amount of whitespace in the forward direction (regardless | |
| 1556 whether hungry-delete mode is enabled or not). This command is bound | |
| 1557 to both @kbd{C-c C-@key{DELETE}} and @kbd{C-c @key{DELETE}} for the | |
| 1558 same reason as for @key{DEL} above. | |
| 1559 @end table | |
| 1560 @end table | |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 @kindex <delete> | |
| 1563 @kindex <backspace> | |
| 1564 | |
| 1565 When we talk about @kbd{@key{DEL}}, and @kbd{@key{DELETE}} above, we | |
| 1566 actually do so without connecting them to the physical keys commonly | |
| 1567 known as @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete}. The default bindings to | |
| 1568 those two keys depends on the flavor of (X)Emacs you are using. | |
| 1569 | |
| 1570 @findex c-electric-delete | |
| 1571 @findex electric-delete (c-) | |
| 1572 @findex c-hungry-delete | |
| 1573 @findex hungry-delete (c-) | |
| 1574 @vindex delete-key-deletes-forward | |
| 1575 In XEmacs 20.3 and beyond, the @key{Backspace} key is bound to | |
| 1576 @code{c-electric-backspace} and the @key{Delete} key is bound to | |
| 1577 @code{c-electric-delete}. You control the direction it deletes in by | |
| 1578 setting the variable @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}, a standard | |
| 1579 XEmacs variable. | |
| 1580 @c This variable is encapsulated by XEmacs's (defsubst delete-forward-p ...). | |
| 1581 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{c-electric-delete} will do | |
| 1582 forward deletion with @code{c-electric-delete-forward}, otherwise it | |
| 1583 does backward deletion with @code{c-electric-backspace}. Similarly, | |
| 1584 @kbd{C-c @key{Delete}} and @kbd{C-c C-@key{Delete}} are bound to | |
| 1585 @code{c-hungry-delete} which is controlled in the same way by | |
| 1586 @code{delete-key-deletes-forward}. | |
| 1587 | |
| 1588 @findex normal-erase-is-backspace-mode | |
| 1589 | |
| 1590 Emacs 21 and later automatically binds @key{Backspace} and | |
| 1591 @key{Delete} to @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} according to your environment, | |
| 1592 and @ccmode{} extends those bindings to @kbd{C-c C-@key{Backspace}} | |
| 1593 etc. If you need to change the bindings through | |
| 1594 @code{normal-erase-is-backspace-mode} then @ccmode{} will also adapt | |
| 1595 its extended bindings accordingly. | |
| 1596 | |
| 1597 In earlier (X)Emacs versions, @ccmode{} doesn't bind either | |
| 1598 @key{Backspace} or @key{Delete} directly. Only the key codes | |
| 1599 @kbd{DEL} and @kbd{C-d} are bound, and it's up to the default bindings | |
| 1600 to map the physical keys to them. You might need to modify this | |
| 1601 yourself if the defaults are unsuitable. | |
| 1602 | |
| 1603 Getting your @key{Backspace} and @key{Delete} keys properly set up can | |
| 1604 sometimes be tricky. The information in @ref{DEL Does Not | |
| 1605 Delete,,,emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, might be helpful if you're having | |
| 1606 trouble with this in GNU Emacs. | |
| 1607 | |
| 1608 | |
| 1609 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1610 @node Subword Movement, Other Commands, Hungry WS Deletion, Commands | |
| 1611 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1612 @section Subword Movement and Editing | |
| 1613 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1614 | |
| 1615 @cindex nomenclature | |
| 1616 @cindex subword | |
| 1617 In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol | |
| 1618 by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g. @samp{GtkWidget}, | |
| 1619 @samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call | |
| 1620 these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized | |
| 1621 (or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a | |
| 1622 @dfn{subword}. Here are some examples: | |
| 1623 | |
| 1624 @multitable {@samp{NSGraphicsContext}} {@samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}} | |
| 1625 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7 | |
| 1626 @iftex | |
| 1627 @item @b{Nomenclature} | |
| 1628 @tab @b{Subwords} | |
| 1629 @end iftex | |
| 1630 @ifnottex | |
| 1631 @item Nomenclature | |
| 1632 @tab Subwords | |
| 1633 @item --------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 1634 @end ifnottex | |
| 1635 @item @samp{GtkWindow} | |
| 1636 @tab @samp{Gtk} and @samp{Window} | |
| 1637 @item @samp{EmacsFrameClass} | |
| 1638 @tab @samp{Emacs}, @samp{Frame}, and @samp{Class} | |
| 1639 @item @samp{NSGraphicsContext} | |
| 1640 @tab @samp{NS}, @samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context} | |
| 1641 @end multitable | |
| 1642 | |
| 1643 The subword minor mode replaces the basic word oriented movement and | |
| 1644 editing commands with variants that recognize subwords in a | |
| 1645 nomenclature and treat them as separate words: | |
| 1646 | |
| 1647 @findex c-forward-subword | |
| 1648 @findex forward-subword (c-) | |
| 1649 @findex c-backward-subword | |
| 1650 @findex backward-subword (c-) | |
| 1651 @findex c-mark-subword | |
| 1652 @findex mark-subword (c-) | |
| 1653 @findex c-kill-subword | |
| 1654 @findex kill-subword (c-) | |
| 1655 @findex c-backward-kill-subword | |
| 1656 @findex backward-kill-subword (c-) | |
| 1657 @findex c-transpose-subwords | |
| 1658 @findex transpose-subwords (c-) | |
| 1659 @findex c-capitalize-subword | |
| 1660 @findex capitalize-subword (c-) | |
| 1661 @findex c-upcase-subword | |
| 1662 @findex upcase-subword (c-) | |
| 1663 @findex c-downcase-subword | |
| 1664 @findex downcase-subword (c-) | |
| 1665 @multitable @columnfractions .20 .40 .40 | |
| 1666 @c This could be converted to @headitem when we require Texinfo 4.7 | |
| 1667 @iftex | |
| 1668 @item @b{Key} @tab @b{Word oriented command} @tab @b{Subword oriented command} | |
| 1669 @end iftex | |
| 1670 @ifnottex | |
| 1671 @item Key @tab Word oriented command @tab Subword oriented command | |
| 1672 @item ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 1673 @end ifnottex | |
| 1674 @item @kbd{M-f} @tab @code{forward-word} @tab @code{c-forward-subword} | |
| 1675 @item @kbd{M-b} @tab @code{backward-word} @tab @code{c-backward-subword} | |
| 1676 @item @kbd{M-@@} @tab @code{mark-word} @tab @code{c-mark-subword} | |
| 1677 @item @kbd{M-d} @tab @code{kill-word} @tab @code{c-kill-subword} | |
| 1678 @item @kbd{M-DEL} @tab @code{backward-kill-word} @tab @code{c-backward-kill-subword} | |
| 1679 @item @kbd{M-t} @tab @code{transpose-words} @tab @code{c-transpose-subwords} | |
| 1680 @item @kbd{M-c} @tab @code{capitalize-word} @tab @code{c-capitalize-subword} | |
| 1681 @item @kbd{M-u} @tab @code{upcase-word} @tab @code{c-upcase-subword} | |
| 1682 @item @kbd{M-l} @tab @code{downcase-word} @tab @code{c-downcase-subword} | |
| 1683 @end multitable | |
| 1684 | |
| 1685 Note that if you have changed the key bindings for the word oriented | |
| 1686 commands in your @file{.emacs} or a similar place, the keys you have | |
| 1687 configured are also used for the corresponding subword oriented | |
| 1688 commands. | |
| 1689 | |
| 1690 Type @kbd{C-c C-w} to toggle subword mode on and off. To make the | |
| 1691 mode turn on automatically, put the following code in your | |
| 1692 @file{.emacs}: | |
| 1693 | |
| 1694 @example | |
| 1695 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook | |
|
106980
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1696 (lambda () (subword-mode 1))) |
| 84286 | 1697 @end example |
| 1698 | |
|
106980
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1699 As a bonus, you can also use @code{subword-mode} in non-@ccmode{} |
|
66e0d01014c6
replace references to obsolete c-subword-mode
Mark A. Hershberger <mhershberger@intrahealth.org>
parents:
106815
diff
changeset
|
1700 buffers by typing @kbd{M-x subword-mode}. |
| 84286 | 1701 |
| 1702 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1703 @node Other Commands, , Subword Movement, Commands | |
| 1704 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1705 @section Other Commands | |
| 1706 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1707 | |
| 1708 Here are the various other commands that didn't fit anywhere else: | |
| 1709 | |
| 1710 @table @asis | |
| 1711 @item @kbd{C-c .} (@code{c-set-style}) | |
| 1712 @kindex C-c . | |
| 1713 @findex c-set-style | |
| 1714 @findex set-style (c-) | |
| 1715 Switch to the specified style in the current buffer. Use like this: | |
| 1716 | |
| 1717 @example | |
| 1718 @kbd{C-c . @var{style-name} @key{RET}} | |
| 1719 @end example | |
| 1720 | |
| 1721 You can use the @key{TAB} in the normal way to do completion on the | |
| 1722 style name. Note that all style names are case insensitive, even the | |
| 1723 ones you define yourself. | |
| 1724 | |
| 1725 Setting a style in this way does @emph{not} automatically reindent your | |
| 1726 file. For commands that you can use to view the effect of your changes, | |
| 1727 see @ref{Indentation Commands} and @ref{Filling and Breaking}. | |
| 1728 | |
| 1729 For details of the @ccmode{} style system, see @ref{Styles}. | |
| 1730 @item @kbd{C-c :} (@code{c-scope-operator}) | |
| 1731 @kindex C-c : | |
| 1732 @findex c-scope-operator | |
| 1733 @findex scope-operator (c-) | |
| 1734 In C++, it is also sometimes desirable to insert the double-colon scope | |
| 1735 operator without performing the electric behavior of colon insertion. | |
| 1736 @kbd{C-c :} does just this. | |
| 1737 | |
| 1738 @item @kbd{C-c C-\} (@code{c-backslash-region}) | |
| 1739 @kindex C-c C-\ | |
| 1740 @findex c-backslash-region | |
| 1741 @findex backslash-region (c-) | |
| 1742 This function inserts and aligns or deletes end-of-line backslashes in | |
| 1743 the current region. These are typically used in multi-line macros. | |
| 1744 | |
| 1745 With no prefix argument, it inserts any missing backslashes and aligns | |
| 1746 them according to the @code{c-backslash-column} and | |
| 1747 @code{c-backslash-max-column} variables. With a prefix argument, it | |
| 1748 deletes any backslashes. | |
| 1749 | |
| 1750 The function does not modify blank lines at the start of the region. If | |
| 1751 the region ends at the start of a line, it always deletes the backslash | |
| 1752 (if any) at the end of the previous line. | |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 To customize the precise workings of this command, @ref{Custom Macros}. | |
| 1755 @end table | |
| 1756 | |
| 1757 @noindent | |
| 1758 The recommended line breaking function, @code{c-context-line-break} | |
| 1759 (@pxref{Filling and Breaking}), is especially nice if you edit | |
| 1760 multiline macros frequently. When used inside a macro, it | |
| 1761 automatically inserts and adjusts the mandatory backslash at the end | |
| 1762 of the line to keep the macro together, and it leaves the point at the | |
| 1763 right indentation column for the code. Thus you can write code inside | |
| 1764 macros almost exactly as you can elsewhere, without having to bother | |
| 1765 with the trailing backslashes. | |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 @table @asis | |
| 1768 @item @kbd{C-c C-e} (@code{c-macro-expand}) | |
| 1769 @kindex C-c C-e | |
| 1770 @findex c-macro-expand | |
| 1771 @findex macro-expand (c-) | |
| 1772 This command expands C, C++, Objective C or Pike macros in the region, | |
| 1773 using an appropriate external preprocessor program. Normally it | |
| 1774 displays its output in a temporary buffer, but if you give it a prefix | |
| 1775 arg (with @kbd{C-u C-c C-e}) it will overwrite the original region | |
| 1776 with the expansion. | |
| 1777 | |
| 1778 The command does not work in any of the other modes, and the key | |
| 1779 sequence is not bound in these other modes. | |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 @code{c-macro-expand} isn't actually part of @ccmode{}, even though it | |
| 1782 is bound to a @ccmode{} key sequence. If you need help setting it up | |
| 1783 or have other problems with it, you can either read its source code or | |
| 1784 ask for help in the standard (X)Emacs forums. | |
| 1785 @end table | |
| 1786 | |
| 1787 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1788 @node Font Locking, Config Basics, Commands, Top | |
| 1789 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1790 @chapter Font Locking | |
| 1791 @cindex font locking | |
| 1792 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1793 | |
| 1794 @cindex Font Lock mode | |
| 1795 | |
| 1796 @ccmode{} provides font locking for its supported languages by | |
| 1797 supplying patterns for use with Font Lock mode. This means that you | |
| 1798 get distinct faces on the various syntactic parts such as comments, | |
| 1799 strings, keywords and types, which is very helpful in telling them | |
| 1800 apart at a glance and discovering syntactic errors. @xref{Font | |
| 1801 Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in | |
| 1802 @ccmode{} buffers. | |
| 1803 | |
| 1804 @strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not | |
| 1805 integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this | |
| 1806 chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK. The other | |
| 1807 sections apply to the other languages. | |
| 1808 | |
| 1809 @menu | |
| 1810 * Font Locking Preliminaries:: | |
| 1811 * Faces:: | |
| 1812 * Doc Comments:: | |
| 1813 * AWK Mode Font Locking:: | |
| 1814 @end menu | |
| 1815 | |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1818 @node Font Locking Preliminaries, Faces, Font Locking, Font Locking | |
| 1819 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1820 @section Font Locking Preliminaries | |
| 1821 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1822 | |
| 1823 The font locking for most of the @ccmode{} languages were provided | |
| 1824 directly by the Font Lock package prior to version 5.30 of @ccmode{}. | |
| 1825 In the transition to @ccmode{} the patterns have been reworked | |
| 1826 completely and are applied uniformly across all the languages except AWK | |
| 1827 mode, just like the indentation rules (although each language still has | |
| 1828 some peculiarities of its own, of course). Since the languages | |
| 1829 previously had completely separate font locking patterns, this means | |
| 1830 that it's a bit different in most languages now. | |
| 1831 | |
| 1832 The main goal for the font locking in @ccmode{} is accuracy, to provide | |
| 1833 a dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like | |
| 1834 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others, like | |
| 1835 declarations and types, can be very tricky. @ccmode{} can go to great | |
| 1836 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when | |
| 1837 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly | |
| 1838 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can | |
| 1839 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the | |
| 1840 variable @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} (@pxref{Font Lock,,, | |
| 1841 emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). | |
| 1842 | |
| 1843 @vindex font-lock-maximum-decoration | |
| 1844 | |
| 1845 The decoration levels are used as follows: | |
| 1846 | |
| 1847 @enumerate | |
| 1848 @comment 1 | |
| 1849 @item | |
| 1850 Minimal font locking: Fontify only comments, strings and preprocessor | |
| 1851 directives (in the languages that use cpp). | |
| 1852 | |
| 1853 @comment 2 | |
| 1854 @item | |
| 1855 Fast font locking: In addition to level 1, fontify keywords, simple | |
| 1856 types and declarations that are easy to recognize. The variables | |
| 1857 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} (where @samp{*} is the name of the | |
| 1858 language) are used to recognize types (see below). Documentation | |
| 1859 comments like Javadoc are fontified according to | |
| 1860 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments}). | |
| 1861 | |
| 1862 Use this if you think the font locking is too slow. It's the closest | |
| 1863 corresponding level to level 3 in the old font lock patterns. | |
| 1864 | |
| 1865 @comment 3 | |
| 1866 @item | |
| 1867 Accurate font locking: Like level 2 but uses a different approach that | |
| 1868 can recognize types and declarations much more accurately. The | |
| 1869 @code{*-font-lock-extra-types} variables are still used, but user | |
| 1870 defined types are recognized correctly anyway in most cases. Therefore | |
| 1871 those variables should be fairly restrictive and not contain patterns | |
| 1872 that are uncertain. | |
| 1873 | |
| 1874 @cindex Lazy Lock mode | |
| 1875 @cindex Just-in-time Lock mode | |
| 1876 | |
| 1877 This level is designed for fairly modern hardware and a font lock | |
| 1878 support mode like Lazy Lock or Just-in-time Lock mode that only | |
| 1879 fontifies the parts that are actually shown. Fontifying the whole | |
| 1880 buffer at once can easily get bothersomely slow even on contemporary | |
| 1881 hardware. @xref{Font Lock,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 1882 @end enumerate | |
| 1883 | |
| 1884 @cindex user defined types | |
| 1885 @cindex types, user defined | |
| 1886 | |
| 1887 Since user defined types are hard to recognize you can provide | |
| 1888 additional regexps to match those you use: | |
| 1889 | |
| 1890 @defopt c-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1891 @defoptx c++-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1892 @defoptx objc-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1893 @defoptx java-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1894 @defoptx idl-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1895 @defoptx pike-font-lock-extra-types | |
| 1896 For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types}, | |
| 1897 where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list | |
| 1898 of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types, | |
| 1899 e.g. @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t} | |
| 1900 as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a | |
| 1901 single identifier. | |
| 1902 | |
| 1903 The default values contain regexps for many types in standard runtime | |
| 1904 libraries that are otherwise difficult to recognize, and patterns for | |
| 1905 standard type naming conventions like the @samp{_t} suffix in C and C++. | |
| 1906 Java, Objective-C and Pike have as a convention to start class names | |
| 1907 with capitals, so there are patterns for that in those languages. | |
| 1908 | |
| 1909 Despite the names of these variables, they are not only used for | |
| 1910 fontification but in other places as well where @ccmode{} needs to | |
| 1911 recognize types. | |
| 1912 @end defopt | |
| 1913 | |
| 1914 | |
| 1915 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1916 @node Faces, Doc Comments, Font Locking Preliminaries, Font Locking | |
| 1917 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 1918 @section Faces | |
| 1919 @cindex faces | |
| 1920 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 1921 | |
| 1922 @ccmode{} attempts to use the standard faces for programming languages | |
| 1923 in accordance with their intended purposes as far as possible. No extra | |
| 1924 faces are currently provided, with the exception of a replacement face | |
| 1925 @code{c-invalid-face} for emacsen that don't provide | |
| 1926 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. | |
| 1927 | |
| 1928 @itemize @bullet | |
| 1929 @item | |
| 1930 @vindex font-lock-comment-face | |
| 1931 Normal comments are fontified in @code{font-lock-comment-face}. | |
| 1932 | |
| 1933 @item | |
| 1934 @vindex font-lock-doc-face | |
| 1935 @vindex font-lock-doc-string-face | |
| 1936 @vindex font-lock-comment-face | |
| 1937 Comments that are recognized as documentation (@pxref{Doc Comments}) | |
| 1938 get @code{font-lock-doc-face} (Emacs) or | |
| 1939 @code{font-lock-doc-string-face} (XEmacs) if those faces exist. If | |
| 1940 they don't then @code{font-lock-comment-face} is used. | |
| 1941 | |
| 1942 @item | |
| 1943 @vindex font-lock-string-face | |
| 1944 String and character literals are fontified in | |
| 1945 @code{font-lock-string-face}. | |
| 1946 | |
| 1947 @item | |
| 1948 @vindex font-lock-keyword-face | |
| 1949 Keywords are fontified with @code{font-lock-keyword-face}. | |
| 1950 | |
| 1951 @item | |
| 1952 @vindex font-lock-function-name-face | |
| 1953 @code{font-lock-function-name-face} is used for function names in | |
| 1954 declarations and definitions, and classes in those contexts. It's also | |
| 1955 used for preprocessor defines with arguments. | |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 @item | |
| 1958 @vindex font-lock-variable-name-face | |
| 1959 Variables in declarations and definitions, and other identifiers in such | |
| 1960 variable contexts, get @code{font-lock-variable-name-face}. It's also | |
| 1961 used for preprocessor defines without arguments. | |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 @item | |
| 1964 @vindex font-lock-constant-face | |
| 1965 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1966 Builtin constants are fontified in @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it | |
| 1967 exists, @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. As opposed to the | |
| 1968 preceding two faces, this is used on the names in expressions, and it's | |
| 1969 not used in declarations, even if there happen to be a @samp{const} in | |
| 1970 them somewhere. | |
| 1971 | |
| 1972 @item | |
| 1973 @vindex font-lock-type-face | |
| 1974 @code{font-lock-type-face} is put on types (both predefined and user | |
| 1975 defined) and classes in type contexts. | |
| 1976 | |
| 1977 @item | |
| 1978 @vindex font-lock-constant-face | |
| 1979 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1980 Label identifiers get @code{font-lock-constant-face} if it exists, | |
| 1981 @code{font-lock-reference-face} otherwise. | |
| 1982 | |
| 1983 @item | |
| 1984 Name qualifiers and identifiers for scope constructs are fontified like | |
| 1985 labels. | |
| 1986 | |
| 1987 @item | |
| 1988 Special markup inside documentation comments are also fontified like | |
| 1989 labels. | |
| 1990 | |
| 1991 @item | |
| 1992 @vindex font-lock-preprocessor-face | |
| 1993 @vindex font-lock-builtin-face | |
| 1994 @vindex font-lock-reference-face | |
| 1995 Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it | |
| 1996 exists (i.e. XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face} | |
| 1997 or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent. | |
| 1998 | |
| 1999 @item | |
| 2000 @vindex font-lock-warning-face | |
| 2001 @vindex c-invalid-face | |
| 2002 @vindex invalid-face (c-) | |
| 2003 Some kinds of syntactic errors are fontified with | |
| 2004 @code{font-lock-warning-face} in Emacs. In older XEmacs versions | |
| 2005 there's no corresponding standard face, so there a special | |
| 2006 @code{c-invalid-face} is used, which is defined to stand out sharply by | |
| 2007 default. | |
| 2008 | |
| 2009 Note that it's not used for @samp{#error} or @samp{#warning} directives, | |
| 2010 since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves. | |
| 2011 @end itemize | |
| 2012 | |
| 2013 | |
| 2014 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2015 @node Doc Comments, AWK Mode Font Locking, Faces, Font Locking | |
| 2016 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2017 @section Documentation Comments | |
| 2018 @cindex documentation comments | |
| 2019 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2020 | |
| 2021 There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as | |
| 2022 specially structured comments, e.g. the standard Javadoc tool in Java. | |
| 2023 @ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and | |
| 2024 the special markup inside them. | |
| 2025 | |
| 2026 @defopt c-doc-comment-style | |
| 2027 @vindex doc-comment-style (c-) | |
| 2028 This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment | |
| 2029 style to recognize, e.g. @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments. | |
| 2030 | |
| 2031 The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are | |
| 2032 recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't | |
| 2033 conflict). | |
| 2034 | |
| 2035 The value may also be an association list to specify different comment | |
| 2036 styles for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is then | |
| 2037 looked up in the alist, and the value of that element is interpreted as | |
| 2038 above if found. If it isn't found then the symbol `other' is looked up | |
| 2039 and its value is used instead. | |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is | |
| 2042 @w{@code{((java-mode . javadoc) (pike-mode . autodoc) (c-mode . gtkdoc))}}. | |
| 2043 | |
| 2044 Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that | |
| 2045 handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when | |
| 2046 you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it | |
| 2047 in some other way, e.g. interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need | |
| 2048 to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to | |
| 2049 reinitialize. | |
| 2050 | |
| 2051 @findex c-setup-doc-comment-style | |
| 2052 @findex setup-doc-comment-style (c-) | |
| 2053 Note also that when @ccmode{} starts up, the other variables are | |
| 2054 modified before the mode hooks are run. If you change this variable in | |
| 2055 a mode hook, you'll have to call @code{c-setup-doc-comment-style} | |
| 2056 afterwards to redo that work. | |
| 2057 @end defopt | |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 @ccmode{} currently provides handing of the following doc comment | |
| 2060 styles: | |
| 2061 | |
| 2062 @table @code | |
| 2063 @item javadoc | |
| 2064 @cindex Javadoc markup | |
| 2065 Javadoc comments, the standard tool in Java. | |
| 2066 | |
| 2067 @item autodoc | |
| 2068 @cindex Pike autodoc markup | |
| 2069 For Pike autodoc markup, the standard in Pike. | |
| 2070 | |
| 2071 @item gtkdoc | |
| 2072 @cindex GtkDoc markup | |
| 2073 For GtkDoc markup, widely used in the Gnome community. | |
| 2074 @end table | |
| 2075 | |
| 2076 The above is by no means complete. If you'd like to see support for | |
| 2077 other doc comment styles, please let us know (@pxref{Mailing Lists and | |
| 2078 Bug Reports}). | |
| 2079 | |
| 2080 You can also write your own doc comment fontification support to use | |
| 2081 with @code{c-doc-comment-style}: Supply a variable or function | |
| 2082 @code{*-font-lock-keywords} where @samp{*} is the name you want to use | |
| 2083 in @code{c-doc-comment-style}. If it's a variable, it's prepended to | |
| 2084 @code{font-lock-keywords}. If it's a function, it's called at mode | |
| 2085 initialization and the result is prepended. For an example, see | |
| 2086 @code{javadoc-font-lock-keywords} in @file{cc-fonts.el}. | |
| 2087 | |
| 2088 If you add support for another doc comment style, please consider | |
| 2089 contributing it - send a note to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. | |
| 2090 | |
| 2091 | |
| 2092 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2093 @node AWK Mode Font Locking, , Doc Comments, Font Locking | |
| 2094 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2095 @section AWK Mode Font Locking | |
| 2096 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2097 | |
| 2098 The general appearance of font-locking in AWK mode is much like in any | |
| 2099 other programming mode. @xref{Faces For Font Lock,,,elisp, GNU Emacs | |
| 2100 Lisp Reference Manual}. | |
| 2101 | |
| 2102 The following faces are, however, used in a non-standard fashion in | |
| 2103 AWK mode: | |
| 2104 | |
| 2105 @table @asis | |
| 2106 @item @code{font-lock-variable-name-face} | |
| 2107 This face was intended for variable declarations. Since variables are | |
| 2108 not declared in AWK, this face is used instead for AWK system | |
| 2109 variables (such as @code{NF}) and ``Special File Names'' (such as | |
| 2110 @code{"/dev/stderr"}). | |
| 2111 | |
| 2112 @item @code{font-lock-builtin-face} (Emacs)/@code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} (XEmacs) | |
| 2113 This face is normally used for preprocessor directives in @ccmode{}. | |
| 2114 There are no such things in AWK, so this face is used instead for | |
| 2115 standard functions (such as @code{match}). | |
| 2116 | |
| 2117 @item @code{font-lock-string-face} | |
| 2118 As well as being used for strings, including localizable strings, | |
| 2119 (delimited by @samp{"} and @samp{_"}), this face is also used for AWK | |
| 2120 regular expressions (delimited by @samp{/}). | |
| 2121 | |
| 2122 @item @code{font-lock-warning-face} (Emacs)/@code{c-invalid-face} (XEmacs) | |
| 2123 This face highlights the following syntactically invalid AWK | |
| 2124 constructs: | |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2127 @item | |
| 2128 An unterminated string or regular expression. Here the opening | |
| 2129 delimiter (@samp{"} or @samp{/} or @samp{_"}) is displayed in | |
| 2130 @code{font-lock-warning-face}. This is most noticeable when typing in a | |
| 2131 new string/regular expression into a buffer, when the warning-face | |
| 2132 serves as a continual reminder to terminate the construct. | |
| 2133 | |
| 2134 AWK mode fontifies unterminated strings/regular expressions | |
| 2135 differently from other modes: Only the text up to the end of the line | |
| 2136 is fontified as a string (escaped newlines being handled correctly), | |
| 2137 rather than the text up to the next string quote. | |
| 2138 | |
| 2139 @item | |
| 2140 A space between the function name and opening parenthesis when calling | |
| 2141 a user function. The last character of the function name and the | |
| 2142 opening parenthesis are highlighted. This font-locking rule will | |
| 2143 spuriously highlight a valid concatenation expression where an | |
| 2144 identifier precedes a parenthesised expression. Unfortunately. | |
| 2145 | |
| 2146 @item | |
| 2147 Whitespace following the @samp{\} in what otherwise looks like an | |
| 2148 escaped newline. The @samp{\} is highlighted. | |
| 2149 @end itemize | |
| 2150 @end table | |
| 2151 | |
| 2152 | |
| 2153 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2154 @node Config Basics, Custom Filling and Breaking, Font Locking, Top | |
| 2155 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2156 @chapter Configuration Basics | |
| 2157 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 @cindex Emacs Initialization File | |
| 2160 @cindex Configuration | |
| 2161 You configure @ccmode{} by setting Lisp variables and calling (and | |
| 2162 perhaps writing) Lisp functions@footnote{DON'T PANIC!!! This isn't | |
| 2163 difficult.}, which is usually done by adding code to an Emacs | |
| 2164 initialization file. This file might be @file{site-start.el} or | |
| 2165 @file{.emacs} or @file{init.el} or @file{default.el} or perhaps some | |
| 2166 other file. @xref{Init File,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. For | |
| 2167 the sake of conciseness, we just call this file ``your @file{.emacs}'' | |
| 2168 throughout the rest of the manual. | |
| 2169 | |
| 2170 Several of these variables (currently 16), are known collectively as | |
| 2171 @dfn{style variables}. @ccmode{} provides a special mechanism, known | |
| 2172 as @dfn{styles} to make it easier to set these variables as a group, | |
| 2173 to ``inherit'' settings from one style into another, and so on. Style | |
| 2174 variables remain ordinary Lisp variables, whose values can be read and | |
| 2175 changed independently of the style system. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 2176 | |
| 2177 There are several ways you can write the code, depending on the | |
| 2178 precise effect you want---they are described further down on this page. | |
| 2179 If you are new to @ccmode{}, we suggest you begin with the simplest | |
| 2180 method, ``Top-level commands or the customization interface''. | |
| 2181 | |
| 2182 If you make conflicting settings in several of these ways, the way | |
| 2183 that takes precedence is the one that appears latest in this list: | |
| 2184 @itemize @asis | |
| 2185 @item | |
| 2186 @table @asis | |
| 2187 @item Style | |
|
104057
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2188 @itemx File Style@footnote{In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, a File Style setting took precedence over any other setting apart from a File Local Variable setting.} |
| 84286 | 2189 @itemx Top-level command or ``customization interface'' |
| 2190 @itemx Hook | |
|
104057
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2191 @itemx File Local Variable setting |
| 84286 | 2192 @end table |
| 2193 @end itemize | |
| 2194 | |
| 2195 Here is a summary of the different ways of writing your configuration | |
| 2196 settings: | |
| 2197 | |
| 2198 @table @asis | |
| 2199 @item Top-level commands or the ``customization interface'' | |
| 2200 Most simply, you can write @code{setq} and similar commands at the top | |
| 2201 level of your @file{.emacs} file. When you load a @ccmode{} buffer, | |
| 2202 it initializes its configuration from these global values (at least, | |
| 2203 for those settings you have given values to), so it makes sense to | |
| 2204 have these @code{setq} commands run @emph{before} @ccmode{} is first | |
| 2205 initialized---in particular, before any call to @code{desktop-read} | |
| 2206 (@pxref{Saving Emacs Sessions,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}). For | |
| 2207 example, you might set c-basic-offset thus: | |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 @example | |
| 2210 (setq c-basic-offset 4) | |
| 2211 @end example | |
| 2212 | |
| 2213 You can use the more user friendly Customization interface instead, | |
| 2214 but this manual does not cover in detail how that works. To do this, | |
| 2215 start by typing @kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET} c @key{RET}}. | |
| 2216 @xref{Easy Customization,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}. | |
| 2217 @c The following note really belongs in the Emacs manual. | |
| 2218 Emacs normally writes the customizations at the end of your | |
| 2219 @file{.emacs} file. If you use @code{desktop-read}, you should edit | |
| 2220 your @file{.emacs} to place the call to @code{desktop-read} @emph{after} | |
| 2221 the customizations. | |
| 2222 | |
| 2223 The first initialization of @ccmode{} puts a snapshot of the | |
| 2224 configuration settings into the special style @code{user}. | |
| 2225 @xref{Built-in Styles}. | |
| 2226 | |
| 2227 For basic use of Emacs, either of these ways of configuring is | |
| 2228 adequate. However, the settings are then the same in all @ccmode{} | |
| 2229 buffers and it can be clumsy to communicate them between programmers. | |
| 2230 For more flexibility, you'll want to use one (or both) of @ccmode{}'s | |
| 2231 more sophisticated facilities, hooks and styles. | |
| 2232 | |
| 2233 @item Hooks | |
| 2234 An Emacs @dfn{hook} is a place to put Lisp functions that you want | |
| 2235 Emacs to execute later in specific circumstances. | |
| 2236 @xref{Hooks,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. @ccmode{} supplies a main | |
| 2237 hook and a language-specific hook for each language it supports - any | |
| 2238 functions you put onto these hooks get executed as the last part of a | |
| 2239 buffer's initialization. Typically you put most of your customization | |
| 2240 within the main hook, and use the language-specific hooks to vary the | |
| 2241 customization settings between language modes. For example, if you | |
| 2242 wanted different (non-standard) values of @code{c-basic-offset} in C | |
| 2243 Mode and Java Mode buffers, you could do it like this: | |
| 2244 | |
| 2245 @example | |
| 2246 @group | |
| 2247 (defun my-c-mode-hook () | |
| 2248 (setq c-basic-offset 3)) | |
| 2249 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook) | |
| 2250 | |
| 2251 (defun my-java-mode-hook () | |
| 2252 (setq c-basic-offset 6)) | |
| 2253 (add-hook 'java-mode-hook 'my-java-mode-hook) | |
| 2254 @end group | |
| 2255 @end example | |
| 2256 | |
| 2257 See @ref{CC Hooks} for more details on the use of @ccmode{} hooks. | |
| 2258 | |
| 2259 @item Styles | |
| 2260 A @ccmode{} @dfn{style} is a coherent collection of customizations | |
| 2261 with a name. At any time, exactly one style is active in each | |
| 2262 @ccmode{} buffer, either the one you have selected or a default. | |
| 2263 @ccmode{} is delivered with several existing styles. Additionally, | |
| 2264 you can create your own styles, possibly based on these existing | |
| 2265 styles. If you worked in a programming team called the ``Free | |
| 2266 Group'', which had its own coding standards, you might well have this | |
| 2267 in your @file{.emacs} file: | |
| 2268 | |
| 2269 @example | |
| 2270 (setq c-default-style '((java-mode . "java") | |
| 2271 (awk-mode . "awk") | |
| 2272 (other . "free-group-style"))) | |
| 2273 @end example | |
| 2274 | |
| 2275 See @ref{Styles} for fuller details on using @ccmode{} styles and how | |
| 2276 to create them. | |
| 2277 | |
|
104057
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2278 @item File Local Variable setting |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2279 A @dfn{file local variable setting} is a setting which applies to an |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2280 individual source file. You put this in a @dfn{local variables list}, |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2281 a special block at the end of the source file (@pxref{Specifying File |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2282 Variables,,, @emacsman{}}). |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2283 |
| 84286 | 2284 @item File Styles |
| 2285 A @dfn{file style} is a rarely used variant of the ``style'' mechanism | |
|
104057
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2286 described above, which applies to an individual source file. |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2287 @xref{File Styles}. You use this by setting certain special variables |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2288 in a local variables list (@pxref{Specifying File Variables,,, |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2289 @emacsman{}}). |
| 84286 | 2290 |
| 2291 @item Hooks with Styles | |
| 2292 For ultimate flexibility, you can use hooks and styles together. For | |
| 2293 example, if your team were developing a product which required a | |
| 2294 Linux driver, you'd probably want to use the ``linux'' style for the | |
| 2295 driver, and your own team's style for the rest of the code. You | |
| 2296 could achieve this with code like this in your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2297 | |
| 2298 @example | |
| 2299 @group | |
| 2300 (defun my-c-mode-hook () | |
| 2301 (c-set-style | |
| 2302 (if (and (buffer-file-name) | |
| 2303 (string-match "/usr/src/linux" (buffer-file-name))) | |
| 2304 "linux" | |
| 2305 "free-group-style"))) | |
| 2306 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook 'my-c-mode-hook) | |
| 2307 @end group | |
| 2308 @end example | |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 In a programming team, a hook is a also a good place for each member | |
| 2311 to put his own personal preferences. For example, you might be the | |
| 2312 only person in your team who likes Auto-newline minor mode. You could | |
| 2313 have it enabled by default by placing the following in your | |
| 2314 @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2315 | |
| 2316 @example | |
| 2317 @group | |
| 2318 (defun my-turn-on-auto-newline () | |
| 2319 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1)) | |
| 2320 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-turn-on-auto-newline) | |
| 2321 @end group | |
| 2322 @end example | |
| 2323 @end table | |
| 2324 | |
| 2325 @menu | |
| 2326 * CC Hooks:: | |
| 2327 * Style Variables:: | |
| 2328 * Styles:: | |
| 2329 @end menu | |
| 2330 | |
| 2331 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2332 @node CC Hooks, Style Variables, Config Basics, Config Basics | |
| 2333 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2334 @section Hooks | |
| 2335 @cindex mode hooks | |
| 2336 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2337 @c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in | |
| 2338 @c some older versions of Info, e.g. the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3. | |
| 2339 @c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC | |
| 2340 @c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC | |
| 2341 @c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead | |
| 2342 @c named "Hooks", that search would spuriously find "*Note: | |
| 2343 @c Hooks(elisp)" and go to the wrong node. | |
| 2344 | |
| 2345 @ccmode{} provides several hooks that you can use to customize the | |
| 2346 mode for your coding style. The main hook is | |
| 2347 @code{c-mode-common-hook}; typically, you'll put the bulk of your | |
| 2348 customizations here. In addition, each language mode has its own | |
| 2349 hook, allowing you to fine tune your settings individually for the | |
| 2350 different @ccmode{} languages, and there is a package initialization | |
| 2351 hook. Finally, there is @code{c-special-indent-hook}, which enables | |
| 2352 you to solve anomalous indentation problems. It is described in | |
| 2353 @ref{Other Indentation}, not here. All these hooks adhere to the | |
| 2354 standard Emacs conventions. | |
| 2355 | |
| 2356 When you open a buffer, @ccmode{} first initializes it with the | |
| 2357 currently active style (@pxref{Styles}). Then it calls | |
| 2358 @code{c-mode-common-hook}, and finally it calls the language-specific | |
| 2359 hook. Thus, any style settings done in these hooks will override | |
| 2360 those set by @code{c-default-style}. | |
| 2361 | |
| 2362 @defvar c-initialization-hook | |
| 2363 @vindex initialization-hook (c-) | |
| 2364 Hook run only once per Emacs session, when @ccmode{} is initialized. | |
| 2365 This is a good place to change key bindings (or add new ones) in any | |
| 2366 of the @ccmode{} key maps. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2367 @end defvar | |
| 2368 | |
| 2369 @defvar c-mode-common-hook | |
| 2370 @vindex mode-common-hook (c-) | |
| 2371 Common hook across all languages. It's run immediately before the | |
| 2372 language specific hook. | |
| 2373 @end defvar | |
| 2374 | |
| 2375 @defvar c-mode-hook | |
| 2376 @defvarx c++-mode-hook | |
| 2377 @defvarx objc-mode-hook | |
| 2378 @defvarx java-mode-hook | |
| 2379 @defvarx idl-mode-hook | |
| 2380 @defvarx pike-mode-hook | |
| 2381 @defvarx awk-mode-hook | |
| 2382 The language specific mode hooks. The appropriate one is run as the | |
| 2383 last thing when you enter that language mode. | |
| 2384 @end defvar | |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 Although these hooks are variables defined in @ccmode{}, you can give | |
| 2387 them values before @ccmode{}'s code is loaded---indeed, this is the | |
| 2388 only way to use @code{c-initialization-hook}. Their values aren't | |
| 2389 overwritten when @ccmode{} gets loaded. | |
| 2390 | |
| 2391 Here's a simplified example of what you can add to your @file{.emacs} | |
| 2392 file to do things whenever any @ccmode{} language is edited. See the | |
| 2393 Emacs manuals for more information on customizing Emacs via hooks. | |
| 2394 @xref{Sample .emacs File}, for a more complete sample @file{.emacs} | |
| 2395 file. | |
| 2396 | |
| 2397 @example | |
| 2398 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 2399 ;; my customizations for all of c-mode and related modes | |
| 2400 (no-case-fold-search) | |
| 2401 ) | |
| 2402 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 2403 @end example | |
| 2404 | |
| 2405 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2406 @node Style Variables, Styles, CC Hooks, Config Basics | |
| 2407 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2408 @section Style Variables | |
| 2409 @cindex styles | |
| 2410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2411 | |
| 2412 @cindex style variables | |
| 2413 The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called | |
| 2414 @dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp | |
| 2415 variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their | |
| 2416 values at any time (e.g. in a hook function). The style system can | |
| 2417 also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}. | |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 @dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways: | |
| 2420 | |
| 2421 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2422 @item | |
| 2423 Style variables are by default buffer-local variables. However, they | |
| 2424 can instead be made global by setting | |
| 2425 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} to @code{nil} before @ccmode{} is | |
| 2426 initialized. | |
| 2427 | |
| 2428 @item | |
| 2429 @vindex c-old-style-variable-behavior | |
| 2430 @vindex old-style-variable-behavior (c-) | |
| 2431 The default global binding of any style variable (with two exceptions | |
| 2432 - see below) is the special symbol @code{set-from-style}. When the | |
| 2433 style system initializes a buffer-local copy of a style variable for a | |
| 2434 @ccmode{} buffer, if its global binding is still that symbol then it | |
| 2435 will be set from the current style. Otherwise it will retain its | |
| 2436 global default@footnote{This is a big change from versions of | |
| 2437 @ccmode{} earlier than 5.26, where such settings would get overridden | |
| 2438 by the style system unless special precautions were taken. That was | |
| 2439 changed since it was counterintuitive and confusing, especially to | |
| 2440 novice users. If your configuration depends on the old overriding | |
| 2441 behavior, you can set the variable | |
| 2442 @code{c-old-style-variable-behavior} to non-@code{nil}.}. This | |
| 2443 ``otherwise'' happens, for example, when you've set the variable with | |
| 2444 @code{setq} at the top level of your @file{.emacs} (@pxref{Config | |
| 2445 Basics}). | |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 @item | |
| 2448 The style variable @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) is | |
| 2449 an association list with an element for each syntactic symbol. It's | |
| 2450 handled a little differently from the other style variables. It's | |
| 2451 default global binding is the empty list @code{nil}, rather than | |
| 2452 @code{set-from-style}. Before the style system is initialized, you | |
| 2453 can add individual elements to @code{c-offsets-alist} by calling | |
| 2454 @code{c-set-offset}(@pxref{c-offsets-alist}) just like you would set | |
| 2455 other style variables with @code{setq}. Those elements will then | |
| 2456 prevail when the style system later initializes a buffer-local copy of | |
| 2457 @code{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 2458 | |
| 2459 @item | |
| 2460 The style variable @code{c-special-indent-hook} is also handled in a | |
| 2461 special way. Styles can only add functions to this hook, not remove | |
| 2462 them, so any global settings you put on it are always | |
| 2463 preserved@footnote{This did not change in version 5.26.}. The value | |
| 2464 you give this variable in a style definition can be either a function | |
| 2465 or a list of functions. | |
| 2466 | |
| 2467 @item | |
| 2468 The global bindings of the style variables get captured in the special | |
| 2469 @code{user} style when the style system is first initialized. | |
| 2470 @xref{Built-in Styles}, for details. | |
| 2471 @end itemize | |
| 2472 | |
| 2473 The style variables are:@* | |
| 2474 @code{c-indent-comment-alist}, | |
| 2475 @code{c-indent-comments-syntactically-p} (@pxref{Indentation | |
| 2476 Commands});@* | |
| 2477 @code{c-doc-comment-style} (@pxref{Doc Comments});@* | |
| 2478 @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} | |
| 2479 (@pxref{Custom Filling and Breaking});@* | |
| 2480 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Braces});@* | |
| 2481 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} (@pxref{Hanging Colons});@* | |
| 2482 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and | |
| 2483 Commas});@* | |
| 2484 @code{c-cleanup-list} (@pxref{Clean-ups});@* | |
| 2485 @code{c-basic-offset} (@pxref{Customizing Indentation});@* | |
| 2486 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{c-offsets-alist});@* | |
| 2487 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset} (@pxref{Comment Line-Up});@* | |
| 2488 @code{c-special-indent-hook}, @code{c-label-minimum-indentation} | |
| 2489 (@pxref{Other Indentation});@* | |
| 2490 @code{c-backslash-column}, @code{c-backslash-max-column} | |
| 2491 (@pxref{Custom Macros}). | |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2494 @node Styles, , Style Variables, Config Basics | |
| 2495 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2496 @section Styles | |
| 2497 @cindex styles | |
| 2498 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2499 | |
| 2500 By @dfn{style} we mean the layout of the code---things like how many | |
| 2501 columns to indent a block of code, whether an opening brace gets | |
| 2502 indented to the level of the code it encloses, or of the construct | |
| 2503 that introduces it, or ``hangs'' at the end of a line. | |
| 2504 | |
| 2505 Most people only need to edit code formatted in just a few well-defined | |
| 2506 and consistent styles. For example, their organization might impose a | |
| 2507 ``blessed'' style that all its programmers must conform to. Similarly, | |
| 2508 people who work on GNU software will have to use the GNU coding style. | |
| 2509 Some shops are more lenient, allowing a variety of coding styles, and as | |
| 2510 programmers come and go, there could be a number of styles in use. For | |
| 2511 this reason, @ccmode{} makes it convenient for you to set up logical | |
| 2512 groupings of customizations called @dfn{styles}, associate a single name | |
| 2513 for any particular style, and pretty easily start editing new or | |
| 2514 existing code using these styles. | |
| 2515 | |
| 2516 @menu | |
| 2517 * Built-in Styles:: | |
| 2518 * Choosing a Style:: | |
| 2519 * Adding Styles:: | |
| 2520 * File Styles:: | |
| 2521 @end menu | |
| 2522 | |
| 2523 | |
| 2524 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2525 @node Built-in Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles, Styles | |
| 2526 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2527 @subsection Built-in Styles | |
| 2528 @cindex styles, built-in | |
| 2529 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2530 | |
| 2531 If you're lucky, one of @ccmode{}'s built-in styles might be just | |
| 2532 what you're looking for. These are: | |
| 2533 | |
| 2534 @table @code | |
| 2535 @item gnu | |
| 2536 @cindex GNU style | |
| 2537 Coding style blessed by the Free Software Foundation | |
| 2538 for C code in GNU programs. | |
| 2539 | |
| 2540 @item k&r | |
| 2541 @cindex K&R style | |
| 2542 The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code. | |
| 2543 | |
| 2544 @item bsd | |
| 2545 @cindex BSD style | |
| 2546 Also known as ``Allman style'' after Eric Allman. | |
| 2547 | |
| 2548 @item whitesmith | |
| 2549 @cindex Whitesmith style | |
| 2550 Popularized by the examples that came with Whitesmiths C, an early | |
| 2551 commercial C compiler. | |
| 2552 | |
| 2553 @item stroustrup | |
| 2554 @cindex Stroustrup style | |
| 2555 The classic Stroustrup style for C++ code. | |
| 2556 | |
| 2557 @item ellemtel | |
| 2558 @cindex Ellemtel style | |
| 2559 Popular C++ coding standards as defined by ``Programming in C++, Rules | |
| 2560 and Recommendations,'' Erik Nyquist and Mats Henricson, | |
| 2561 Ellemtel@footnote{This document is available at | |
| 2562 @uref{http://www.doc.ic.ac.uk/lab/cplus/c++.rules/} among other | |
| 2563 places.}. | |
| 2564 @c N.B. This URL was still valid at 2005/8/28 (ACM). | |
| 2565 | |
| 2566 @item linux | |
| 2567 @cindex Linux style | |
| 2568 C coding standard for Linux (the kernel). | |
| 2569 | |
| 2570 @item python | |
| 2571 @cindex Python style | |
| 2572 C coding standard for Python extension modules@footnote{Python is a | |
| 2573 high level scripting language with a C/C++ foreign function interface. | |
| 2574 For more information, see @uref{http://www.python.org/}.}. | |
| 2575 | |
| 2576 @item java | |
| 2577 @cindex Java style | |
| 2578 The style for editing Java code. Note that the default | |
| 2579 value for @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter | |
| 2580 @code{java-mode}. | |
| 2581 | |
| 2582 @item awk | |
| 2583 @cindex AWK style | |
| 2584 The style for editing AWK code. Note that the default value for | |
| 2585 @code{c-default-style} installs this style when you enter | |
| 2586 @code{awk-mode}. | |
| 2587 | |
| 2588 @item user | |
| 2589 @cindex User style | |
| 2590 This is a special style created by you. It consists of the factory | |
| 2591 defaults for all the style variables as modified by the customizations | |
| 2592 you do either with the Customization interface or by writing | |
| 2593 @code{setq}s and @code{c-set-offset}s at the top level of your | |
| 2594 @file{.emacs} file (@pxref{Config Basics}). The style system creates | |
| 2595 this style as part of its initialization and doesn't modify it | |
| 2596 afterwards. | |
| 2597 @end table | |
| 2598 | |
| 2599 | |
| 2600 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2601 @node Choosing a Style, Adding Styles, Built-in Styles, Styles | |
| 2602 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2603 @subsection Choosing a Style | |
| 2604 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2605 | |
| 2606 When you create a new buffer, its style will be set from | |
| 2607 @code{c-default-style}. The factory default is the style @code{gnu}, | |
| 2608 except in Java and AWK modes where it's @code{java} and @code{awk}. | |
| 2609 | |
| 2610 Remember that if you set a style variable with the Customization | |
| 2611 interface or at the top level of your @file{.emacs} file before the | |
|
96449
80392a5671b7
American English spelling fixes.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95936
diff
changeset
|
2612 style system is initialized (@pxref{Config Basics}), this setting will |
| 84286 | 2613 override the one that the style system would have given the variable. |
| 2614 | |
| 2615 To set a buffer's style interactively, use the command @kbd{C-c .} | |
| 2616 (@pxref{Other Commands}). To set it from a file's local variable | |
| 2617 list, @ref{File Styles}. | |
| 2618 | |
| 2619 @defopt c-default-style | |
| 2620 @vindex default-style (c-) | |
| 2621 This variable specifies which style to install by default in new | |
| 2622 buffers. It takes either a style name string, or an association list | |
| 2623 of major mode symbols to style names: | |
| 2624 | |
| 2625 @enumerate | |
| 2626 @item | |
| 2627 When @code{c-default-style} is a string, it must be an existing style | |
| 2628 name. This style is then used for all modes. | |
| 2629 | |
| 2630 @item | |
| 2631 When @code{c-default-style} is an association list, the mode language | |
| 2632 is looked up to find a style name string. | |
| 2633 | |
| 2634 @item | |
| 2635 If @code{c-default-style} is an association list where the mode | |
| 2636 language mode isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is | |
| 2637 looked up. If it's found then the associated style is used. | |
| 2638 | |
| 2639 @item | |
| 2640 If @samp{other} is not found then the @samp{gnu} style is used. | |
| 2641 @end enumerate | |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 In all cases, the style described in @code{c-default-style} is installed | |
| 2644 @emph{before} the language hooks are run, so you can always override | |
| 2645 this setting by including an explicit call to @code{c-set-style} in your | |
| 2646 language mode hook, or in @code{c-mode-common-hook}. | |
| 2647 | |
| 2648 The standard value of @code{c-default-style} is @w{@code{((java-mode | |
| 2649 . "java") (awk-mode . "awk") (other . "gnu"))}}. | |
| 2650 @end defopt | |
| 2651 | |
| 2652 @defvar c-indentation-style | |
| 2653 @vindex indentation-style (c-) | |
| 2654 This variable always contains the buffer's current style name, as a | |
| 2655 string. | |
| 2656 @end defvar | |
| 2657 | |
| 2658 | |
| 2659 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2660 @node Adding Styles, File Styles, Choosing a Style, Styles | |
| 2661 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2662 @subsection Adding and Amending Styles | |
| 2663 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2664 | |
| 2665 If none of the built-in styles is appropriate, you'll probably want to | |
| 2666 create a new @dfn{style definition}, possibly based on an existing | |
| 2667 style. To do this, put the new style's settings into a list with the | |
| 2668 following format - the list can then be passed as an argument to the | |
| 2669 function @code{c-add-style}. You can see an example of a style | |
| 2670 definition in @ref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2671 | |
| 2672 @cindex style definition | |
| 2673 @c @defvr {List} style definition | |
| 2674 @table @asis | |
| 2675 @item Structure of a Style Definition List | |
| 2676 ([@var{base-style}] [(@var{variable} . @var{value}) @dots{}]) | |
| 2677 | |
| 2678 Optional @var{base-style}, if present, must be a string which is the | |
| 2679 name of the @dfn{base style} from which this style inherits. At most | |
| 2680 one @var{base-style} is allowed in a style definition. If | |
| 2681 @var{base-style} is not specified, the style inherits from the table | |
| 2682 of factory default values@footnote{This table is stored internally in | |
| 2683 the variable c-fallback-style.} instead. All styles eventually | |
| 2684 inherit from this internal table. Style loops generate errors. The | |
| 2685 list of pre-existing styles can be seen in @ref{Built-in Styles}. | |
| 2686 | |
| 2687 The dotted pairs (@var{variable} . @var{value}) each consist of a | |
| 2688 variable and the value it is to be set to when the style is later | |
| 2689 activated.@footnote{Note that if the variable has been given a value | |
| 2690 by the Customization interface or a @code{setq} at the top level of | |
| 2691 your @file{.emacs}, this value will override the one the style system | |
| 2692 tries to give it. @xref{Config Basics}.} The variable can be either a | |
| 2693 @ccmode{} style variable or an arbitrary Emacs variable. In the | |
| 2694 latter case, it is @emph{not} made buffer-local by the @ccmode{} style | |
| 2695 system. | |
| 2696 @c @end defvr | |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 Two variables are treated specially in the dotted pair list: | |
| 2699 | |
| 2700 @table @code | |
| 2701 @item c-offsets-alist | |
| 2702 The value is in turn a list of dotted pairs of the form | |
| 2703 | |
| 2704 @example | |
| 2705 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{offset}}) | |
| 2706 @end example | |
| 2707 | |
| 2708 as described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. These are passed to | |
| 2709 @code{c-set-offset} so there is no need to set every syntactic symbol | |
| 2710 in your style, only those that are different from the inherited style. | |
| 2711 | |
| 2712 @item c-special-indent-hook | |
| 2713 The value is added to @code{c-special-indent-hook} using | |
| 2714 @code{add-hook}, so any functions already on it are kept. If the value | |
| 2715 is a list, each element of the list is added with @code{add-hook}. | |
| 2716 @end table | |
| 2717 @end table | |
| 2718 | |
| 2719 Styles are kept in the @code{c-style-alist} variable, but you | |
| 2720 should never modify this variable directly. Instead, @ccmode{} | |
| 2721 provides the function @code{c-add-style} for this purpose. | |
| 2722 | |
| 2723 @defun c-add-style stylename description &optional set-p | |
| 2724 @findex add-style (c-) | |
| 2725 Add or update a style called @var{stylename}, a string. | |
| 2726 @var{description} is the new style definition in the form described | |
| 2727 above. If @var{stylename} already exists in @code{c-style-alist} then | |
| 2728 it is replaced by @var{description}. (Note, this replacement is | |
| 2729 total. The old style is @emph{not} merged into the new one.) | |
| 2730 Otherwise, a new style is added. | |
| 2731 | |
| 2732 If the optional @var{set-p} is non-@code{nil} then the new style is | |
| 2733 applied to the current buffer as well. The use of this facility is | |
| 2734 deprecated and it might be removed from @ccmode{} in a future release. | |
| 2735 You should use @code{c-set-style} instead. | |
| 2736 | |
| 2737 The sample @file{.emacs} file provides a concrete example of how a new | |
| 2738 style can be added and automatically set. @xref{Sample .emacs File}. | |
| 2739 @end defun | |
| 2740 | |
| 2741 @defvar c-style-alist | |
| 2742 @vindex style-alist (c-) | |
| 2743 This is the variable that holds the definitions for the styles. It | |
| 2744 should not be changed directly; use @code{c-add-style} instead. | |
| 2745 @end defvar | |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 | |
| 2748 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2749 @node File Styles, , Adding Styles, Styles | |
| 2750 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2751 @subsection File Styles | |
| 2752 @cindex styles, file local | |
| 2753 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2754 | |
| 2755 @cindex file local variables | |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 The Emacs manual describes how you can customize certain variables on a | |
| 2758 per-file basis by including a @dfn{file local variable} block at the end | |
| 2759 of the file (@pxref{File Variables,, Local Variables in Files, @emacsman{}, | |
| 2760 @emacsmantitle{}}). | |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 So far, you've only seen a functional interface for setting styles in | |
| 2763 @ccmode{}, and this can't be used here. @ccmode{} fills the gap by | |
| 2764 providing two variables for use in a file's local variable list. | |
| 2765 Don't use them anywhere else! These allow you to customize the style | |
| 2766 on a per-file basis: | |
| 2767 | |
| 2768 @defvar c-file-style | |
| 2769 @vindex file-style (c-) | |
| 2770 Set this variable to a style name string in the Local Variables list. | |
| 2771 From now on, when you visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically set | |
| 2772 the file's style to this one using @code{c-set-style}. | |
| 2773 @end defvar | |
| 2774 | |
| 2775 @defvar c-file-offsets | |
| 2776 @vindex file-offsets (c-) | |
| 2777 Set this variable (in the Local Variables list) to an association list | |
| 2778 of the same format as @code{c-offsets-alist}. From now on, when you | |
| 2779 visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets | |
| 2780 using @code{c-set-offset}. | |
| 2781 @end defvar | |
| 2782 | |
| 2783 Note that file style settings (i.e. @code{c-file-style}) are applied | |
| 2784 before file offset settings | |
| 2785 (i.e. @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set | |
| 2786 in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are | |
| 2787 made local to that buffer, even if | |
| 2788 @code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this | |
| 2789 variable is virtually always non-@code{nil} anyhow, you're unlikely to | |
| 2790 notice this effect.}. | |
| 2791 | |
|
104057
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2792 If you set any variable by the file local variables mechanism, that |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2793 setting takes priority over all other settings, even those in your |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2794 mode hooks (@pxref{CC Hooks}). Any individual setting of a variable |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2795 will override one made through @code{c-file-style} or |
|
00b7bce74d52
(Config Basics, File Styles): Document that at mode initialization, any
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
102059
diff
changeset
|
2796 @code{c-file-offsets}. |
| 84286 | 2797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! |
| 2798 @node Custom Filling and Breaking, Custom Auto-newlines, Config Basics, Top | |
| 2799 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 2800 @chapter Customizing Filling and Line Breaking | |
| 2801 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 2802 | |
| 2803 Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals, | |
| 2804 @ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. It does | |
| 2805 this by hooking in on the different line breaking functions and tuning | |
| 2806 relevant variables as necessary. | |
| 2807 | |
| 2808 @vindex c-comment-prefix-regexp | |
| 2809 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-) | |
| 2810 @cindex comment line prefix | |
| 2811 @vindex comment-start | |
| 2812 @vindex comment-end | |
| 2813 @vindex comment-start-skip | |
| 2814 @vindex paragraph-start | |
| 2815 @vindex paragraph-separate | |
| 2816 @vindex paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix | |
| 2817 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode | |
| 2818 @vindex adaptive-fill-regexp | |
| 2819 @vindex adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp | |
| 2820 To make Emacs recognize comments and treat text in them as normal | |
| 2821 paragraphs, @ccmode{} makes several standard | |
| 2822 variables@footnote{@code{comment-start}, @code{comment-end}, | |
| 2823 @code{comment-start-skip}, @code{paragraph-start}, | |
| 2824 @code{paragraph-separate}, @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix}, | |
| 2825 @code{adaptive-fill-mode}, @code{adaptive-fill-regexp}, and | |
| 2826 @code{adaptive-fill-first-line-regexp}.} buffer-local and modifies them | |
| 2827 according to the language syntax and the comment line prefix. | |
| 2828 | |
| 2829 @defopt c-comment-prefix-regexp | |
| 2830 @vindex comment-prefix-regexp (c-) | |
| 2831 This style variable contains the regexp used to recognize the | |
| 2832 @dfn{comment line prefix}, which is the line decoration that starts | |
| 2833 every line in a comment. The variable is either the comment line | |
| 2834 prefix itself, or (more usually) an association list with different | |
| 2835 values for different languages. The symbol for the major mode is | |
| 2836 looked up in the alist to get the regexp for the language, and if it | |
| 2837 isn't found then the special symbol @samp{other} is looked up instead. | |
| 2838 | |
| 2839 When a comment line gets divided by @kbd{M-j} or the like, @ccmode{} | |
|
96449
80392a5671b7
American English spelling fixes.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95936
diff
changeset
|
2840 inserts the comment line prefix from a neighboring line at the start |
| 84286 | 2841 of the new line. The default value of c-comment-prefix-regexp is |
| 2842 @samp{//+\\|\\**}, which matches C++ style line comments like | |
| 2843 | |
| 2844 @example | |
| 2845 // blah blah | |
| 2846 @end example | |
| 2847 | |
| 2848 @noindent | |
| 2849 with two or more slashes in front of them, and the second and | |
| 2850 subsequent lines of C style block comments like | |
| 2851 | |
| 2852 @example | |
| 2853 @group | |
| 2854 /* | |
| 2855 * blah blah | |
| 2856 */ | |
| 2857 @end group | |
| 2858 @end example | |
| 2859 | |
| 2860 @noindent | |
| 2861 with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change | |
| 2862 this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter | |
| 2863 (i.e. @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside | |
| 2864 block comments. | |
| 2865 | |
| 2866 @findex c-setup-paragraph-variables | |
| 2867 @findex setup-paragraph-variables (c-) | |
| 2868 Also note that since @ccmode{} uses the value of | |
| 2869 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to set up several other variables at | |
| 2870 mode initialization, there won't be any effect if you just change it | |
| 2871 inside a @ccmode{} buffer. You need to call the command | |
| 2872 @code{c-setup-paragraph-variables} too, to update those other | |
| 2873 variables. That's also the case if you modify | |
| 2874 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} in a mode hook, since @ccmode{} will | |
| 2875 already have set up these variables before calling the hook. | |
| 2876 @end defopt | |
| 2877 | |
| 2878 In comments, @ccmode{} uses @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} to adapt | |
| 2879 the line prefix from the other lines in the comment. | |
| 2880 | |
| 2881 @vindex adaptive-fill-mode | |
| 2882 @cindex Adaptive Fill mode | |
| 2883 @ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU | |
| 2884 Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when | |
| 2885 filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text | |
| 2886 indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g. in the | |
| 2887 following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left | |
| 2888 margins of the texts kept intact: | |
| 2889 | |
| 2890 @example | |
| 2891 @group | |
| 2892 /* Make a balanced b-tree of the nodes in the incoming | |
| 2893 * stream. But, to quote the famous words of Donald E. | |
| 2894 * Knuth, | |
| 2895 * | |
| 2896 * Beware of bugs in the above code; I have only | |
| 2897 * proved it correct, not tried it. | |
| 2898 */ | |
| 2899 @end group | |
| 2900 @end example | |
| 2901 | |
| 2902 @findex c-setup-filladapt | |
| 2903 @findex setup-filladapt (c-) | |
| 2904 @findex filladapt-mode | |
| 2905 @vindex filladapt-mode | |
| 2906 @cindex Filladapt mode | |
| 2907 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages, notably Kyle | |
| 2908 E. Jones' Filladapt package@footnote{It's available from | |
| 2909 @uref{http://www.wonderworks.com/}. As of version 2.12, it does however | |
| 2910 lack a feature that makes it work suboptimally when | |
| 2911 @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} matches the empty string (which it does | |
| 2912 by default). A patch for that is available from | |
| 2913 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/,, the CC Mode web site}.}, | |
| 2914 @c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case. | |
| 2915 which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience | |
| 2916 function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in | |
| 2917 Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g. with | |
| 2918 something like this in your @file{.emacs}: | |
| 2919 | |
| 2920 @example | |
| 2921 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 2922 (c-setup-filladapt) | |
| 2923 (filladapt-mode 1)) | |
| 2924 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 2925 @end example | |
| 2926 | |
| 2927 @defopt c-block-comment-prefix | |
| 2928 @vindex block-comment-prefix (c-) | |
| 2929 @vindex c-comment-continuation-stars | |
| 2930 @vindex comment-continuation-stars (c-) | |
| 2931 Normally the comment line prefix inserted for a new line inside a | |
| 2932 comment is deduced from other lines in it. However there's one | |
| 2933 situation when there's no hint about what the prefix should look like, | |
| 2934 namely when a block comment is broken for the first time. This style | |
| 2935 variable@footnote{In versions before 5.26, this variable was called | |
| 2936 @code{c-comment-continuation-stars}. As a compatibility measure, | |
| 2937 @ccmode{} still uses the value on that variable if it's set.} is used | |
| 2938 then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{* | |
| 2939 }@footnote{Actually, this default setting of | |
| 2940 @code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default | |
| 2941 style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line | |
| 2942 splitting effect described here by setting a different style, | |
| 2943 e.g. @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment | |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 @example | |
| 2946 /* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */ | |
| 2947 @end example | |
| 2948 | |
| 2949 @noindent | |
| 2950 break into | |
| 2951 | |
| 2952 @example | |
| 2953 @group | |
| 2954 /* Got O(n^2) here, which | |
| 2955 * is a Bad Thing. */ | |
| 2956 @end group | |
| 2957 @end example | |
| 2958 | |
| 2959 Note that it won't work to adjust the indentation by putting leading | |
| 2960 spaces in @code{c-block-comment-prefix}, since @ccmode{} still uses the | |
| 2961 normal indentation engine to indent the line. Thus, the right way to | |
| 2962 fix the indentation is by customizing the @code{c} syntactic symbol. It | |
| 2963 defaults to @code{c-lineup-C-comments}, which handles the indentation of | |
| 2964 most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}. | |
| 2965 @end defopt | |
| 2966 | |
| 2967 @defopt c-ignore-auto-fill | |
| 2968 @vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-) | |
| 2969 When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it | |
| 2970 depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g. to never | |
| 2971 break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable | |
| 2972 takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling | |
| 2973 never should occur: | |
| 2974 | |
| 2975 @table @code | |
| 2976 @item string | |
| 2977 Inside a string or character literal. | |
| 2978 @item c | |
| 2979 Inside a C style block comment. | |
| 2980 @item c++ | |
| 2981 Inside a C++ style line comment. | |
| 2982 @item cpp | |
| 2983 Inside a preprocessor directive. | |
| 2984 @item code | |
| 2985 Anywhere else, i.e. in normal code. | |
| 2986 @end table | |
| 2987 | |
| 2988 By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp | |
| 2989 code)}, which means that when auto-fill mode is activated, | |
| 2990 auto-filling only occurs in comments. In literals, it's often | |
| 2991 desirable to have explicit control over newlines. In preprocessor | |
| 2992 directives, the necessary @samp{\} escape character before the newline | |
| 2993 is not automatically inserted, so an automatic line break would | |
| 2994 produce invalid code. In normal code, line breaks are normally | |
| 2995 dictated by some logical structure in the code rather than the last | |
| 2996 whitespace character, so automatic line breaks there will produce poor | |
| 2997 results in the current implementation. | |
| 2998 @end defopt | |
| 2999 | |
| 3000 @vindex comment-multi-line | |
| 3001 If inside a comment and @code{comment-multi-line} (@pxref{Auto Fill,,, | |
| 3002 @emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}} is non-@code{nil}, the indentation and | |
| 3003 line prefix are preserved. If inside a comment and | |
| 3004 @code{comment-multi-line} is @code{nil}, a new comment of the same | |
| 3005 type is started on the next line and indented as appropriate for | |
| 3006 comments. | |
| 3007 | |
| 3008 Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at | |
| 3009 startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences | |
| 3010 of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated | |
| 3011 as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code | |
| 3012 (e.g. @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to | |
| 3013 inconsistent behavior. | |
| 3014 | |
| 3015 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3016 @node Custom Auto-newlines, Clean-ups, Custom Filling and Breaking, Top | |
| 3017 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3018 @chapter Customizing Auto-newlines | |
| 3019 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3020 | |
| 3021 @ccmode{} determines whether to insert auto-newlines in two basically | |
| 3022 different ways, depending on the character just typed: | |
| 3023 | |
| 3024 @table @asis | |
| 3025 @item Braces and Colons | |
| 3026 @ccmode{} first determines the syntactic context of the brace or colon | |
| 3027 (@pxref{Syntactic Symbols}), then looks for a corresponding element in | |
| 3028 an alist. This element specifies where to put newlines - this is any | |
| 3029 combination of before and after the brace or colon. If no alist | |
| 3030 element is found, newlines are inserted both before and after a brace, | |
| 3031 but none are inserted around a colon. See @ref{Hanging Braces} and | |
| 3032 @ref{Hanging Colons}. | |
| 3033 | |
| 3034 @item Semicolons and Commas | |
| 3035 The variable @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} contains a list of | |
| 3036 functions which determine whether to insert a newline after a newly | |
| 3037 typed semicolon or comma. @xref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}. | |
| 3038 @end table | |
| 3039 | |
| 3040 The names of these configuration variables contain @samp{hanging} | |
| 3041 because they let you @dfn{hang} the pertinent characters. A character | |
| 3042 which introduces a C construct is said to @dfn{hang on the right} when | |
| 3043 it appears at the end of a line after other code, being separated by a | |
| 3044 line break from the construct it introduces, like the opening brace in: | |
| 3045 | |
| 3046 @example | |
| 3047 @group | |
| 3048 while (i < MAX) @{ | |
| 3049 total += entry[i]; | |
| 3050 entry [i++] = 0; | |
| 3051 @} | |
| 3052 @end group | |
| 3053 @end example | |
| 3054 | |
| 3055 @noindent | |
| 3056 A character @dfn{hangs on the left} when it appears at the start of | |
| 3057 the line after the construct it closes off, like the above closing | |
| 3058 brace. | |
| 3059 | |
| 3060 The next chapter, ``Clean-ups'', describes how to configure @ccmode{} | |
| 3061 to remove these automatically added newlines in certain specific | |
| 3062 circumstances. @xref{Clean-ups}. | |
| 3063 | |
| 3064 @menu | |
| 3065 * Hanging Braces:: | |
| 3066 * Hanging Colons:: | |
| 3067 * Hanging Semicolons and Commas:: | |
| 3068 @end menu | |
| 3069 | |
| 3070 | |
| 3071 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3072 @node Hanging Braces, Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3073 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3074 @section Hanging Braces | |
| 3075 @cindex hanging braces | |
| 3076 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3077 | |
| 3078 To specify which kinds of braces you want auto-newlines put around, | |
| 3079 you set the style variable @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. Its | |
| 3080 structure and semantics are described in this section. Details of how | |
| 3081 to set it up, and its relationship to CC Mode's style system are given | |
| 3082 in @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 3083 | |
| 3084 Say you wanted an auto-newline after (but not before) the following | |
| 3085 @samp{@{}: | |
| 3086 | |
| 3087 @example | |
| 3088 if (foo < 17) @{ | |
| 3089 @end example | |
| 3090 | |
| 3091 @noindent | |
| 3092 First you need to find the @dfn{syntactic context} of the brace---type | |
| 3093 a @key{RET} before the brace to get it on a line of its | |
| 3094 own@footnote{Also insert a @samp{\} at the end of the previous line if | |
| 3095 you're in AWK Mode.}, then type @kbd{C-c C-s}. That will tell you | |
| 3096 something like: | |
| 3097 | |
| 3098 @example | |
| 3099 ((substatement-open 1061)) | |
| 3100 @end example | |
| 3101 | |
| 3102 @noindent | |
| 3103 So here you need to put the entry @code{(substatement-open . (after))} | |
| 3104 into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}. | |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 If you don't want any auto-newlines for a particular syntactic symbol, | |
| 3107 put this into @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}: | |
| 3108 | |
| 3109 @example | |
| 3110 (brace-entry-open) | |
| 3111 @end example | |
| 3112 | |
| 3113 If some brace syntactic symbol is not in @code{c-hanging-brace-alist}, | |
| 3114 its entry is taken by default as @code{(before after)}---insert a | |
| 3115 newline both before and after the brace. In place of a | |
| 3116 ``before/after'' list you can specify a function in this alist---this | |
| 3117 is useful when the auto newlines depend on the code around the brace. | |
| 3118 | |
| 3119 @defopt c-hanging-braces-alist | |
| 3120 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-) | |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 This variable is an association list which maps syntactic symbols to | |
| 3123 lists of places to insert a newline. @xref{Association | |
| 3124 Lists,,,@lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}. The key of each element is the | |
| 3125 syntactic symbol, the associated value is either @code{nil}, a list, | |
| 3126 or a function. | |
| 3127 | |
| 3128 @table @asis | |
| 3129 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol | |
| 3130 The syntactic symbols that are useful as keys in this list are | |
| 3131 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 3132 @code{inexpr-class-open}, @code{inexpr-class-close}, and all the | |
| 3133 @code{*-open} and @code{*-close} symbols. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, | |
| 3134 for a more detailed description of these syntactic symbols, except for | |
| 3135 @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, which aren't | |
| 3136 actual syntactic symbols. Elements with any other value as a key get | |
| 3137 ignored. | |
| 3138 | |
| 3139 The braces of anonymous inner classes in Java are given the special | |
| 3140 symbols @code{inexpr-class-open} and @code{inexpr-class-close}, so that | |
| 3141 they can be distinguished from the braces of normal classes@footnote{The | |
| 3142 braces of anonymous classes produce a combination of | |
| 3143 @code{inexpr-class}, and @code{class-open} or @code{class-close} in | |
| 3144 normal indentation analysis.}. | |
| 3145 | |
| 3146 Note that the aggregate constructs in Pike mode, @samp{(@{}, @samp{@})}, | |
| 3147 @samp{([}, @samp{])}, and @samp{(<}, @samp{>)}, do not count as brace | |
| 3148 lists in this regard, even though they do for normal indentation | |
| 3149 purposes. It's currently not possible to set automatic newlines on | |
| 3150 these constructs. | |
| 3151 | |
| 3152 @item The associated value - the ``ACTION'' list or function | |
| 3153 The value associated with each syntactic symbol in this association | |
| 3154 list is called an @var{action}, which can be either a list or a | |
| 3155 function which returns a list. @xref{Custom Braces}, for how to use | |
| 3156 a function as a brace hanging @var{action}. | |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 The list @var{action} (or the list returned by @var{action} when it's | |
| 3159 a function) contains some combination of the symbols @code{before} and | |
| 3160 @code{after}, directing @ccmode{} where to put newlines in | |
| 3161 relationship to the brace being inserted. Thus, if the list contains | |
| 3162 only the symbol @code{after}, then the brace hangs on the right side | |
| 3163 of the line, as in: | |
| 3164 | |
| 3165 @example | |
| 3166 // here, open braces always `hang' | |
| 3167 void spam( int i ) @{ | |
| 3168 if( i == 7 ) @{ | |
| 3169 dosomething(i); | |
| 3170 @} | |
| 3171 @} | |
| 3172 @end example | |
| 3173 | |
| 3174 When the list contains both @code{after} and @code{before}, the braces | |
| 3175 will appear on a line by themselves, as shown by the close braces in | |
| 3176 the above example. The list can also be empty, in which case newlines | |
| 3177 are added neither before nor after the brace. | |
| 3178 @end table | |
| 3179 | |
| 3180 If a syntactic symbol is missing entirely from | |
| 3181 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, it's treated in the same way as an | |
| 3182 @var{action} with a list containing @code{before} and @code{after}, so | |
| 3183 that braces by default end up on their own line. | |
| 3184 | |
| 3185 For example, the default value of @code{c-hanging-braces-alist} is: | |
| 3186 | |
| 3187 @example | |
| 3188 ((brace-list-open) | |
| 3189 (brace-entry-open) | |
| 3190 (statement-cont) | |
| 3191 (substatement-open after) | |
| 3192 (block-close . c-snug-do-while) | |
| 3193 (extern-lang-open after) | |
| 3194 (namespace-open after) | |
| 3195 (module-open after) | |
| 3196 (composition-open after) | |
| 3197 (inexpr-class-open after) | |
| 3198 (inexpr-class-close before)) | |
| 3199 @end example | |
| 3200 | |
| 3201 @noindent which says that @code{brace-list-open}, | |
| 3202 @code{brace-entry-open} and @code{statement-cont}@footnote{Brace lists | |
| 3203 inside statements, such as initializers for static array variables | |
| 3204 inside functions in C, are recognized as @code{statement-cont}. All | |
| 3205 normal substatement blocks are recognized with other symbols.} braces | |
| 3206 should both hang on the right side and allow subsequent text to follow | |
| 3207 on the same line as the brace. Also, @code{substatement-open}, | |
| 3208 @code{extern-lang-open}, and @code{inexpr-class-open} braces should hang | |
| 3209 on the right side, but subsequent text should follow on the next line. | |
| 3210 The opposite holds for @code{inexpr-class-close} braces; they won't | |
| 3211 hang, but the following text continues on the same line. Here, in the | |
| 3212 @code{block-close} entry, you also see an example of using a function as | |
| 3213 an @var{action}. In all other cases, braces are put on a line by | |
| 3214 themselves. | |
| 3215 @end defopt | |
| 3216 | |
| 3217 @menu | |
| 3218 * Custom Braces:: | |
| 3219 @end menu | |
| 3220 | |
| 3221 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3222 @node Custom Braces, , Hanging Braces, Hanging Braces | |
| 3223 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3224 @subsection Custom Brace Hanging | |
| 3225 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3226 | |
| 3227 @vindex c-hanging-braces-alist | |
| 3228 @vindex hanging-braces-alist (c-) | |
| 3229 @cindex action functions | |
| 3230 Syntactic symbols aren't the only place where you can customize | |
| 3231 @ccmode{} with the lisp equivalent of callback functions. Remember | |
| 3232 that @var{action}s are usually a list containing some combination of | |
| 3233 the symbols @code{before} and @code{after} (@pxref{Hanging Braces}). | |
| 3234 For more flexibility, you can instead specify brace ``hanginess'' by | |
| 3235 giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in | |
| 3236 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}; this function determines the | |
| 3237 ``hanginess'' of a brace, usually by looking at the code near it. | |
| 3238 | |
| 3239 @cindex customization, brace hanging | |
| 3240 An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol | |
| 3241 for the brace (e.g. @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position | |
| 3242 where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an | |
| 3243 action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g. by using | |
| 3244 @code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing | |
| 3245 some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither | |
| 3246 of them (i.e. @code{nil}). | |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 @defvar c-syntactic-context | |
| 3249 @vindex syntactic-context (c-) | |
| 3250 During the call to the indentation or brace hanging @var{action} | |
| 3251 function, this variable is bound to the full syntactic analysis list. | |
| 3252 This might be, for example, @samp{((block-close 73))}. Don't ever | |
| 3253 give @code{c-syntactic-context} a value yourself---this would disrupt | |
| 3254 the proper functioning of @ccmode{}. | |
| 3255 | |
| 3256 This variable is also bound in three other circumstances: | |
| 3257 (i)@w{ }when calling a c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria function | |
| 3258 (@pxref{Hanging Semicolons and Commas}); (ii)@w{ }when calling a | |
| 3259 line-up function (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}); (iii)@w{ }when calling a | |
| 3260 c-special-indent-hook function (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 3261 @end defvar | |
| 3262 | |
| 3263 As an example, @ccmode{} itself uses this feature to dynamically | |
| 3264 determine the hanginess of braces which close ``do-while'' | |
| 3265 constructs: | |
| 3266 | |
| 3267 @example | |
| 3268 void do_list( int count, char** atleast_one_string ) | |
| 3269 @{ | |
| 3270 int i=0; | |
| 3271 do @{ | |
| 3272 handle_string( atleast_one_string[i] ); | |
| 3273 i++; | |
| 3274 @} while( i < count ); | |
| 3275 @} | |
| 3276 @end example | |
| 3277 | |
| 3278 @ccmode{} assigns the @code{block-close} syntactic symbol to the | |
| 3279 brace that closes the @code{do} construct, and normally we'd like the | |
| 3280 line that follows a @code{block-close} brace to begin on a separate | |
| 3281 line. However, with ``do-while'' constructs, we want the | |
| 3282 @code{while} clause to follow the closing brace. To do this, we | |
| 3283 associate the @code{block-close} symbol with the @var{action} function | |
| 3284 @code{c-snug-do-while}: | |
| 3285 | |
| 3286 @example | |
| 3287 (defun c-snug-do-while (syntax pos) | |
| 3288 "Dynamically calculate brace hanginess for do-while statements." | |
| 3289 (save-excursion | |
| 3290 (let (langelem) | |
| 3291 (if (and (eq syntax 'block-close) | |
| 3292 (setq langelem (assq 'block-close c-syntactic-context)) | |
| 3293 (progn (goto-char (cdr langelem)) | |
| 3294 (if (= (following-char) ?@{) | |
| 3295 (forward-sexp -1)) | |
| 3296 (looking-at "\\<do\\>[^_]"))) | |
| 3297 '(before) | |
| 3298 '(before after))))) | |
| 3299 @end example | |
| 3300 | |
| 3301 @findex c-snug-do-while | |
| 3302 @findex snug-do-while (c-) | |
| 3303 This function simply looks to see if the brace closes a ``do-while'' | |
| 3304 clause and if so, returns the list @samp{(before)} indicating | |
| 3305 that a newline should be inserted before the brace, but not after it. | |
| 3306 In all other cases, it returns the list @samp{(before after)} so | |
| 3307 that the brace appears on a line by itself. | |
| 3308 | |
| 3309 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3310 @node Hanging Colons, Hanging Semicolons and Commas, Hanging Braces, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3311 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3312 @section Hanging Colons | |
| 3313 @cindex hanging colons | |
| 3314 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3315 | |
| 3316 @cindex customization, colon hanging | |
| 3317 @vindex c-hanging-colons-alist | |
| 3318 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-) | |
| 3319 | |
| 3320 Using a mechanism similar to brace hanging (@pxref{Hanging Braces}), | |
| 3321 colons can also be made to hang using the style variable | |
| 3322 @code{c-hanging-colons-alist} - When a colon is typed, @ccmode | |
| 3323 determines its syntactic context, looks this up in the alist | |
| 3324 @code{c-changing-colons-alist} and inserts up to two newlines | |
| 3325 accordingly. Here, however, If @ccmode fails to find an entry for a | |
| 3326 syntactic symbol in the alist, no newlines are inserted around the | |
| 3327 newly typed colon. | |
| 3328 | |
| 3329 @defopt c-hanging-colons-alist | |
| 3330 @vindex hanging-colons-alist (c-) | |
| 3331 | |
| 3332 @table @asis | |
| 3333 @item The Key - the syntactic symbol | |
| 3334 The syntactic symbols appropriate as keys in this association list | |
| 3335 are: @code{case-label}, @code{label}, @code{access-label}, | |
| 3336 @code{member-init-intro}, and @code{inher-intro}. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 3337 Symbols}. Elements with any other value as a key get ignored. | |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 @item The associate value - the ``ACTION'' list | |
| 3340 The @var{action} here is simply a list containing a combination of the | |
| 3341 symbols @code{before} and @code{after}. Unlike in | |
| 3342 @code{c-hanging-braces-alist}, functions as @var{actions} are not | |
| 3343 supported - there doesn't seem to be any need for them. | |
| 3344 @end table | |
| 3345 @end defopt | |
| 3346 | |
| 3347 In C++, double-colons are used as a scope operator but because these | |
| 3348 colons always appear right next to each other, newlines before and after | |
| 3349 them are controlled by a different mechanism, called @dfn{clean-ups} in | |
| 3350 @ccmode{}. @xref{Clean-ups}, for details. | |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3353 @node Hanging Semicolons and Commas, , Hanging Colons, Custom Auto-newlines | |
| 3354 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3355 @section Hanging Semicolons and Commas | |
| 3356 @cindex hanging semicolons | |
| 3357 @cindex hanging commas | |
| 3358 @cindex customization, semicolon newlines | |
| 3359 @cindex customization, comma newlines | |
| 3360 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3361 | |
| 3362 @defopt c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria | |
| 3363 @vindex hanging-semi&comma-criteria (c-) | |
| 3364 This style variable takes a list of functions; these get called when | |
| 3365 you type a semicolon or comma. The functions are called in order | |
| 3366 without arguments. When these functions are entered, point is just | |
| 3367 after the newly inserted @samp{;} or @samp{,} and they must preserve | |
| 3368 point (e.g., by using @code{save-excursion}). During the call, the | |
| 3369 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the syntactic context | |
| 3370 of the current line@footnote{This was first introduced in @ccmode{} | |
| 3371 5.31.} @pxref{Custom Braces}. These functions don't insert newlines | |
| 3372 themselves, rather they direct @ccmode{} whether or not to do so. | |
| 3373 They should return one of the following values: | |
| 3374 | |
| 3375 @table @code | |
| 3376 @item t | |
| 3377 A newline is to be inserted after the @samp{;} or @samp{,}, and no | |
| 3378 more functions from the list are to be called. | |
| 3379 @item stop | |
| 3380 No more functions from the list are to be called, and no newline is to | |
| 3381 be inserted. | |
| 3382 @item nil | |
| 3383 No determination has been made, and the next function in the list is | |
| 3384 to be called. | |
| 3385 @end table | |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 Note that auto-newlines are never inserted @emph{before} a semicolon | |
| 3388 or comma. If every function in the list is called without a | |
| 3389 determination being made, then no newline is added. | |
| 3390 | |
| 3391 In AWK mode, this variable is set by default to @code{nil}. In the | |
| 3392 other modes, the default value is a list containing a single function, | |
| 3393 @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist}. This inserts newlines after all | |
| 3394 semicolons, apart from those separating @code{for}-clause statements. | |
| 3395 @end defopt | |
| 3396 | |
| 3397 @defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks | |
| 3398 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks (c-) | |
| 3399 This is an example of a criteria function, provided by @ccmode{}. It | |
| 3400 prevents newlines from being inserted after semicolons when there is a | |
| 3401 non-blank following line. Otherwise, it makes no determination. To | |
| 3402 use, add this function to the front of the | |
| 3403 @code{c-hanging-semi&comma-criteria} list. | |
| 3404 | |
| 3405 @example | |
| 3406 (defun c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks () | |
| 3407 (save-excursion | |
| 3408 (if (and (eq last-command-char ?\;) | |
| 3409 (zerop (forward-line 1)) | |
| 3410 (not (looking-at "^[ \t]*$"))) | |
| 3411 'stop | |
| 3412 nil))) | |
| 3413 @end example | |
| 3414 @end defun | |
| 3415 | |
| 3416 @defun c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist | |
| 3417 @findex semi&comma-inside-parenlist (c-) | |
| 3418 @defunx c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners | |
| 3419 @findex semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners (c-) | |
| 3420 The function @code{c-semi&comma-inside-parenlist} is what prevents | |
| 3421 newlines from being inserted inside the parenthesis list of @code{for} | |
| 3422 statements. In addition to | |
| 3423 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-before-nonblanks} described above, | |
| 3424 @ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function | |
| 3425 @code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses | |
| 3426 newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions | |
| 3427 (e.g. in C++ or Java). | |
| 3428 @end defun | |
| 3429 | |
| 3430 | |
| 3431 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3432 @node Clean-ups, Indentation Engine Basics, Custom Auto-newlines, Top | |
| 3433 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3434 @chapter Clean-ups | |
| 3435 @cindex clean-ups | |
| 3436 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3437 | |
| 3438 @dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add) | |
| 3439 whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon | |
| 3440 and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into | |
| 3441 @code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g. like this: | |
| 3442 | |
| 3443 @example | |
| 3444 (add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall) | |
| 3445 @end example | |
| 3446 | |
| 3447 On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality | |
| 3448 provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups, | |
| 3449 however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e. to adjust | |
| 3450 the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed. | |
| 3451 | |
| 3452 Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are | |
| 3453 only active when auto-newline minor mode is turned on. Others will | |
| 3454 work all the time. Note that clean-ups are only performed when there | |
| 3455 is nothing but whitespace appearing between the individual components | |
| 3456 of the construct, and (apart from @code{comment-close-slash}) when the | |
| 3457 construct does not occur within a literal (@pxref{Auto-newlines}). | |
| 3458 | |
| 3459 @defopt c-cleanup-list | |
| 3460 @vindex cleanup-list (c-) | |
| 3461 @cindex literal | |
| 3462 | |
| 3463 You configure @ccmode{}'s clean-ups by setting the style variable | |
| 3464 @code{c-cleanup-list}, which is a list of clean-up symbols. By | |
| 3465 default, @ccmode{} cleans up only the @code{scope-operator} construct, | |
| 3466 which is necessary for proper C++ support. | |
| 3467 @end defopt | |
| 3468 | |
| 3469 These are the clean-ups that are only active when electric and | |
| 3470 auto-newline minor modes are enabled: | |
| 3471 | |
| 3472 @c TBD: Would like to use some sort of @deffoo here; @table indents a | |
| 3473 @c bit too much in dvi output. | |
| 3474 @table @code | |
| 3475 @item brace-else-brace | |
| 3476 Clean up @samp{@} else @{} constructs by placing the entire construct on | |
| 3477 a single line. Clean up occurs when the open brace after the | |
| 3478 @samp{else} is typed. So for example, this: | |
| 3479 | |
| 3480 @example | |
| 3481 @group | |
| 3482 void spam(int i) | |
| 3483 @{ | |
| 3484 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3485 dosomething(); | |
| 3486 @} | |
| 3487 else | |
| 3488 @{ | |
| 3489 @end group | |
| 3490 @end example | |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 @noindent | |
| 3493 appears like this after the last open brace is typed: | |
| 3494 | |
| 3495 @example | |
| 3496 @group | |
| 3497 void spam(int i) | |
| 3498 @{ | |
| 3499 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3500 dosomething(); | |
| 3501 @} else @{ | |
| 3502 @end group | |
| 3503 @end example | |
| 3504 | |
| 3505 @item brace-elseif-brace | |
| 3506 Similar to the @code{brace-else-brace} clean-up, but this cleans up | |
| 3507 @samp{@} else if (...) @{} constructs. For example: | |
| 3508 | |
| 3509 @example | |
| 3510 @group | |
| 3511 void spam(int i) | |
| 3512 @{ | |
| 3513 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3514 dosomething(); | |
| 3515 @} | |
| 3516 else if( i==3 ) | |
| 3517 @{ | |
| 3518 @end group | |
| 3519 @end example | |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 @noindent | |
| 3522 appears like this after the last open parenthesis is typed: | |
| 3523 | |
| 3524 @example | |
| 3525 @group | |
| 3526 void spam(int i) | |
| 3527 @{ | |
| 3528 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3529 dosomething(); | |
| 3530 @} else if( | |
| 3531 @end group | |
| 3532 @end example | |
| 3533 | |
| 3534 @noindent | |
| 3535 and like this after the last open brace is typed: | |
| 3536 | |
| 3537 @example | |
| 3538 @group | |
| 3539 void spam(int i) | |
| 3540 @{ | |
| 3541 if( i==7 ) @{ | |
| 3542 dosomething(); | |
| 3543 @} else if( i==3 ) @{ | |
| 3544 @end group | |
| 3545 @end example | |
| 3546 | |
| 3547 @item brace-catch-brace | |
| 3548 Analogous to @code{brace-elseif-brace}, but cleans up @samp{@} catch | |
| 3549 (...) @{} in C++ and Java mode. | |
| 3550 | |
| 3551 @item empty-defun-braces | |
| 3552 Clean up braces following a top-level function or class definition that | |
| 3553 contains no body. Clean up occurs when the closing brace is typed. | |
| 3554 Thus the following: | |
| 3555 | |
| 3556 @example | |
| 3557 @group | |
| 3558 class Spam | |
| 3559 @{ | |
| 3560 @} | |
| 3561 @end group | |
| 3562 @end example | |
| 3563 | |
| 3564 @noindent | |
| 3565 is transformed into this when the close brace is typed: | |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 @example | |
| 3568 @group | |
| 3569 class Spam | |
| 3570 @{@} | |
| 3571 @end group | |
| 3572 @end example | |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 @item defun-close-semi | |
| 3575 Clean up the terminating semicolon on top-level function or class | |
| 3576 definitions when they follow a close brace. Clean up occurs when the | |
| 3577 semicolon is typed. So for example, the following: | |
| 3578 | |
| 3579 @example | |
| 3580 @group | |
| 3581 class Spam | |
| 3582 @{ | |
| 3583 ... | |
| 3584 @} | |
| 3585 ; | |
| 3586 @end group | |
| 3587 @end example | |
| 3588 | |
| 3589 @noindent | |
| 3590 is transformed into this when the semicolon is typed: | |
| 3591 | |
| 3592 @example | |
| 3593 @group | |
| 3594 class Spam | |
| 3595 @{ | |
| 3596 ... | |
| 3597 @}; | |
| 3598 @end group | |
| 3599 @end example | |
| 3600 | |
| 3601 @item list-close-comma | |
| 3602 Clean up commas following braces in array and aggregate initializers. | |
| 3603 Clean up occurs when the comma is typed. The space before the comma | |
| 3604 is zapped just like the space before the semicolon in | |
| 3605 @code{defun-close-semi}. | |
| 3606 | |
| 3607 @item scope-operator | |
| 3608 Clean up double colons which might designate a C++ scope operator split | |
| 3609 across multiple lines@footnote{Certain C++ constructs introduce | |
| 3610 ambiguous situations, so @code{scope-operator} clean-ups might not | |
| 3611 always be correct. This usually only occurs when scoped identifiers | |
| 3612 appear in switch label tags.}. Clean up occurs when the second colon is | |
| 3613 typed. You will always want @code{scope-operator} in the | |
| 3614 @code{c-cleanup-list} when you are editing C++ code. | |
| 3615 | |
| 3616 @item one-liner-defun | |
| 3617 Clean up a single line of code enclosed by defun braces by removing | |
| 3618 the whitespace before and after the code. The clean-up happens when | |
| 3619 the closing brace is typed. If the variable | |
| 3620 @code{c-max-one-liner-length} is set, the cleanup is only done if the | |
| 3621 resulting line would be no longer than the value of that variable. | |
| 3622 | |
| 3623 For example, consider this AWK code: | |
| 3624 | |
| 3625 @example | |
| 3626 @group | |
| 3627 BEGIN @{ | |
| 3628 FS = "\t" # use <TAB> as a field separator | |
| 3629 @} | |
| 3630 @end group | |
| 3631 @end example | |
| 3632 | |
| 3633 @noindent | |
| 3634 It gets compacted to the following when the closing brace is typed: | |
| 3635 | |
| 3636 @example | |
| 3637 @group | |
| 3638 BEGIN @{FS = "\t"@} # use <TAB> as a field separator | |
| 3639 @end group | |
| 3640 @end example | |
| 3641 | |
| 3642 @defopt c-max-one-liner-length | |
| 3643 @vindex max-one-liner-length (c-) | |
| 3644 The maximum length of the resulting line for which the clean-up | |
| 3645 @code{one-liner-defun} will be triggered. This length is that of the entire | |
| 3646 line, including any leading whitespace and any trailing comment. Its | |
| 3647 default value is 80. If the value is zero or @code{nil}, no limit | |
| 3648 applies. | |
| 3649 @end defopt | |
| 3650 @end table | |
| 3651 | |
| 3652 The following clean-ups are always active when they occur on | |
| 3653 @code{c-cleanup-list}, regardless of whether Electric minor mode or | |
| 3654 Auto-newline minor mode are enabled: | |
| 3655 | |
| 3656 @table @code | |
| 3657 @item space-before-funcall | |
| 3658 Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis | |
| 3659 of a function call. This produces function calls in the style | |
| 3660 mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g. @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT, | |
| 3661 SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening | |
| 3662 parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK | |
| 3663 Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined | |
| 3664 functions. | |
| 3665 | |
| 3666 @item compact-empty-funcall | |
| 3667 Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis | |
| 3668 of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used | |
| 3669 together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function | |
| 3670 call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when | |
| 3671 it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e. you will get @samp{signal | |
| 3672 (SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the | |
| 3673 closing parenthesis is typed. | |
| 3674 | |
| 3675 @item comment-close-slash | |
| 3676 When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash | |
| 3677 at the beginning of a line (i.e. immediately after the comment prefix). | |
| 3678 This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed, | |
| 3679 inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this | |
| 3680 situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted. | |
| 3681 @end table | |
| 3682 | |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3685 @node Indentation Engine Basics, Customizing Indentation, Clean-ups, Top | |
| 3686 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3687 @chapter Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3688 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3689 | |
| 3690 This chapter will briefly cover how @ccmode{} indents lines of code. | |
| 3691 It is helpful to understand the indentation model being used so that | |
| 3692 you will know how to customize @ccmode{} for your personal coding | |
| 3693 style. All the details are in @ref{Customizing Indentation}. | |
| 3694 | |
| 3695 @ccmode{} has an indentation engine that provides a flexible and | |
| 3696 general mechanism for customizing indentation. When @ccmode{} indents | |
| 3697 a line of code, it separates its calculations into two steps: | |
| 3698 | |
| 3699 @enumerate | |
| 3700 @item | |
| 3701 @cindex syntactic symbol | |
| 3702 @cindex anchor position | |
| 3703 It analyzes the line to determine its @dfn{syntactic symbol(s)} (the | |
| 3704 kind of language construct it's looking at) and its @dfn{anchor | |
| 3705 position} (the position earlier in the file that @ccmode{} will indent | |
| 3706 the line relative to). The anchor position might be the location of | |
| 3707 an opening brace in the previous line, for example. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 3708 Analysis}. | |
| 3709 @item | |
| 3710 @cindex offsets | |
| 3711 @cindex indentation offset specifications | |
| 3712 It looks up the syntactic symbol(s) in the configuration to get the | |
| 3713 corresponding @dfn{offset(s)}. The symbol @code{+}, which means | |
| 3714 ``indent this line one more level'' is a typical offset. @ccmode{} | |
| 3715 then applies these offset(s) to the anchor position, giving the | |
| 3716 indentation for the line. The different sorts of offsets are | |
| 3717 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 3718 @end enumerate | |
| 3719 | |
| 3720 In exceptional circumstances, the syntax directed indentation | |
| 3721 described here may be a nuisance rather than a help. You can disable | |
| 3722 it by setting @code{c-syntactic-indentation} to @code{nil}. (To set | |
| 3723 the variable interactively, @ref{Minor Modes}). | |
| 3724 | |
| 3725 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation | |
| 3726 @vindex syntactic-indentation (c-) | |
| 3727 When this is non-@code{nil} (which it is by default), the indentation | |
| 3728 of code is done according to its syntactic structure. When it's | |
| 3729 @code{nil}, every line is just indented to the same level as the | |
| 3730 previous one, and @kbd{TAB} (@code{c-indent-command}) adjusts the | |
| 3731 indentation in steps of @code{c-basic-offset}. The current style | |
| 3732 (@pxref{Config Basics}) then has no effect on indentation, nor do any | |
| 3733 of the variables associated with indentation, not even | |
| 3734 @code{c-special-indent-hook}. | |
| 3735 @end defopt | |
| 3736 | |
| 3737 @menu | |
| 3738 * Syntactic Analysis:: | |
| 3739 * Syntactic Symbols:: | |
| 3740 * Indentation Calculation:: | |
| 3741 @end menu | |
| 3742 | |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3745 @node Syntactic Analysis, Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3746 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3747 @section Syntactic Analysis | |
| 3748 @cindex syntactic analysis | |
| 3749 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3750 | |
| 3751 @cindex syntactic element | |
| 3752 @cindex syntactic context | |
| 3753 The first thing @ccmode{} does when indenting a line of code, is to | |
| 3754 analyze the line, determining the @dfn{syntactic context} of the | |
| 3755 (first) construct on that line. It's a list of @dfn{syntactic | |
| 3756 elements}, where each syntactic element in turn is a list@footnote{In | |
| 3757 @ccmode 5.28 and earlier, a syntactic element was a dotted pair; the | |
| 3758 cons was the syntactic symbol and the cdr was the anchor position. | |
| 3759 For compatibility's sake, the parameter passed to a line-up function | |
| 3760 still has this dotted pair form (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}).} Here is a | |
| 3761 brief and typical example: | |
| 3762 | |
| 3763 @example | |
| 3764 ((defun-block-intro 1959)) | |
| 3765 @end example | |
| 3766 | |
| 3767 @cindex syntactic symbol | |
| 3768 @noindent | |
| 3769 The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a | |
| 3770 @dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was | |
| 3771 recognized, e.g. @code{statement}, @code{substatement}, | |
| 3772 @code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, | |
| 3773 for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and | |
| 3774 their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated | |
| 3775 with the recognized construct - there might be zero or more. | |
| 3776 | |
| 3777 @cindex anchor position | |
| 3778 Conceptually, a line of code is always indented relative to some | |
| 3779 position higher up in the buffer (typically the indentation of the | |
| 3780 previous line). That position is the @dfn{anchor position} in the | |
| 3781 syntactic element. If there is an entry after the syntactic symbol in | |
| 3782 the syntactic element list then it's either nil or that anchor position. | |
| 3783 | |
| 3784 Here is an example. Suppose we had the following code as the only thing | |
| 3785 in a C++ buffer @footnote{The line numbers in this and future examples | |
| 3786 don't actually appear in the buffer, of course!}: | |
| 3787 | |
| 3788 @example | |
| 3789 1: void swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 3790 2: @{ | |
| 3791 3: int tmp = a; | |
| 3792 4: a = b; | |
| 3793 5: b = tmp; | |
| 3794 6: @} | |
| 3795 @end example | |
| 3796 | |
| 3797 @noindent | |
| 3798 We can use @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) to | |
| 3799 report what the syntactic analysis is for the current line: | |
| 3800 | |
| 3801 @table @asis | |
| 3802 @item @kbd{C-c C-s} (@code{c-show-syntactic-information}) | |
| 3803 @kindex C-c C-s | |
| 3804 @findex c-show-syntactic-information | |
| 3805 @findex show-syntactic-information (c-) | |
| 3806 This command calculates the syntactic analysis of the current line and | |
| 3807 displays it in the minibuffer. The command also highlights the anchor | |
| 3808 position(s). | |
| 3809 @end table | |
| 3810 | |
| 3811 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo | |
| 3812 area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the | |
| 3813 analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current | |
| 3814 line.}: | |
| 3815 | |
| 3816 @example | |
| 3817 ((statement 35)) | |
| 3818 @end example | |
| 3819 | |
| 3820 @noindent | |
| 3821 and the @samp{i} of @code{int} on line 3 would be highlighted. This | |
| 3822 tells us that the line is a statement and it is indented relative to | |
| 3823 buffer position 35, the highlighted position. If you were to move | |
| 3824 point to line 3 and hit @kbd{C-c C-s}, you would see: | |
| 3825 | |
| 3826 @example | |
| 3827 ((defun-block-intro 29)) | |
| 3828 @end example | |
| 3829 | |
| 3830 @noindent | |
| 3831 This indicates that the @samp{int} line is the first statement in a top | |
| 3832 level function block, and is indented relative to buffer position 29, | |
| 3833 which is the brace just after the function header. | |
| 3834 | |
| 3835 Here's another example: | |
| 3836 | |
| 3837 @example | |
| 3838 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 3839 2: @{ | |
| 3840 3: if( doit ) | |
| 3841 4: @{ | |
| 3842 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 3843 6: @} | |
| 3844 7: return( val ); | |
| 3845 8: @} | |
| 3846 @end example | |
| 3847 | |
| 3848 @noindent | |
| 3849 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 gives us: | |
| 3850 | |
| 3851 @example | |
| 3852 ((substatement-open 46)) | |
| 3853 @end example | |
| 3854 | |
| 3855 @cindex substatement | |
| 3856 @cindex substatement block | |
| 3857 @noindent | |
| 3858 which tells us that this is a brace that @emph{opens} a substatement | |
| 3859 block. @footnote{A @dfn{substatement} is the line after a | |
| 3860 conditional statement, such as @code{if}, @code{else}, @code{while}, | |
| 3861 @code{do}, @code{switch}, etc. A @dfn{substatement | |
| 3862 block} is a brace block following one of these conditional statements.} | |
| 3863 | |
| 3864 @cindex comment-only line | |
| 3865 Syntactic contexts can contain more than one element, and syntactic | |
| 3866 elements need not have anchor positions. The most common example of | |
| 3867 this is a @dfn{comment-only line}: | |
| 3868 | |
| 3869 @example | |
| 3870 1: void draw_list( List<Drawables>& drawables ) | |
| 3871 2: @{ | |
| 3872 3: // call the virtual draw() method on each element in list | |
| 3873 4: for( int i=0; i < drawables.count(), ++i ) | |
| 3874 5: @{ | |
| 3875 6: drawables[i].draw(); | |
| 3876 7: @} | |
| 3877 8: @} | |
| 3878 @end example | |
| 3879 | |
| 3880 @noindent | |
| 3881 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 3 of this example gives: | |
| 3882 | |
| 3883 @example | |
| 3884 ((comment-intro) (defun-block-intro 46)) | |
| 3885 @end example | |
| 3886 | |
| 3887 @noindent | |
| 3888 and you can see that the syntactic context contains two syntactic | |
| 3889 elements. Notice that the first element, @samp{(comment-intro)}, has no | |
| 3890 anchor position. | |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 | |
| 3893 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3894 @node Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Calculation, Syntactic Analysis, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 3895 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 3896 @section Syntactic Symbols | |
| 3897 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 3898 | |
| 3899 @cindex syntactic symbols, brief list | |
| 3900 @vindex c-offsets-alist | |
| 3901 @vindex offsets-alist (c-) | |
| 3902 This section is a complete list of the syntactic symbols which appear | |
| 3903 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable, along with brief | |
| 3904 descriptions. The previous section (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}) | |
| 3905 states what syntactic symbols are and how the indentation engine uses | |
| 3906 them. | |
| 3907 | |
| 3908 More detailed descriptions of these symbols, together with snippets of | |
| 3909 source code to which they apply, appear in the examples in the | |
| 3910 subsections below. Note that, in the interests of brevity, the anchor | |
| 3911 position associated with most syntactic symbols is @emph{not} | |
| 3912 specified. In cases of doubt, type @kbd{C-c C-s} on a pertinent | |
| 3913 line---this highlights the anchor position. | |
| 3914 | |
| 3915 @ssindex -open symbols | |
| 3916 @ssindex -close symbols | |
| 3917 @ssindex -block-intro symbols | |
| 3918 The syntactic symbols which indicate brace constructs follow a general | |
| 3919 naming convention. When a line begins with an open or close brace, | |
| 3920 its syntactic symbol will contain the suffix @code{-open} or | |
| 3921 @code{-close} respectively. The first line within the brace block | |
| 3922 construct will contain the suffix @code{-block-intro}. | |
| 3923 | |
| 3924 @ssindex -intro symbols | |
| 3925 @ssindex -cont symbols | |
| 3926 In constructs which can span several lines, a distinction is usually | |
| 3927 made between the first line that introduces the construct and the | |
| 3928 lines that continue it. The syntactic symbols that indicate these | |
| 3929 lines will contain the suffixes @code{-intro} or @code{-cont} | |
| 3930 respectively. | |
| 3931 | |
| 3932 The best way to understand how all this works is by looking at some | |
| 3933 examples. Remember that you can see the syntax of any source code | |
| 3934 line by using @kbd{C-c C-s}. | |
| 3935 | |
| 3936 @table @code | |
| 3937 @item string | |
| 3938 Inside a multiline string. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3939 @item c | |
| 3940 Inside a multiline C style block comment. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3941 @item defun-open | |
| 3942 Brace that opens a top-level function definition. @ref{Function | |
| 3943 Symbols}. | |
| 3944 @item defun-close | |
| 3945 Brace that closes a top-level function definition. @ref{Function | |
| 3946 Symbols}. | |
| 3947 @item defun-block-intro | |
| 3948 The first line in a top-level defun. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3949 @item class-open | |
| 3950 Brace that opens a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3951 @item class-close | |
| 3952 Brace that closes a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3953 @item inline-open | |
| 3954 Brace that opens an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3955 @item inline-close | |
| 3956 Brace that closes an in-class inline method. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3957 @item func-decl-cont | |
| 3958 The region between a function definition's argument list and the | |
| 3959 function opening brace (excluding K&R argument declarations). In C, | |
| 3960 you cannot put anything but whitespace and comments in this region, | |
| 3961 however in C++ and Java, @code{throws} declarations and other things | |
| 3962 can appear here. @ref{Literal Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can it not | |
| 3963 @c go somewhere better?} | |
| 3964 @item knr-argdecl-intro | |
| 3965 First line of a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}. | |
| 3966 @item knr-argdecl | |
| 3967 Subsequent lines in a K&R C argument declaration. @ref{K&R Symbols}. | |
| 3968 @item topmost-intro | |
| 3969 The first line in a ``topmost'' definition. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3970 @item topmost-intro-cont | |
| 3971 Topmost definition continuation lines. This is only used in the parts | |
| 3972 that aren't covered by other symbols such as @code{func-decl-cont} and | |
| 3973 @code{knr-argdecl}. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 3974 @item member-init-intro | |
| 3975 First line in a member initialization list. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3976 @item member-init-cont | |
| 3977 Subsequent member initialization list lines. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3978 @item inher-intro | |
| 3979 First line of a multiple inheritance list. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3980 @item inher-cont | |
| 3981 Subsequent multiple inheritance lines. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 3982 @item block-open | |
| 3983 Statement block open brace. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 3984 @item block-close | |
| 3985 Statement block close brace. @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 3986 @item brace-list-open | |
| 3987 Open brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3988 @item brace-list-close | |
| 3989 Close brace of an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3990 @item brace-list-intro | |
| 3991 First line in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3992 @item brace-list-entry | |
| 3993 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list. @ref{Brace List | |
| 3994 Symbols}. | |
| 3995 @item brace-entry-open | |
| 3996 Subsequent lines in an enum or static array list where the line begins | |
| 3997 with an open brace. @ref{Brace List Symbols}. | |
| 3998 @item statement | |
| 3999 A statement. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 4000 @item statement-cont | |
| 4001 A continuation of a statement. @ref{Function Symbols}. | |
| 4002 @item statement-block-intro | |
| 4003 The first line in a new statement block. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4004 Symbols}. | |
| 4005 @item statement-case-intro | |
| 4006 The first line in a case block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4007 @item statement-case-open | |
| 4008 The first line in a case block that starts with a brace. @ref{Switch | |
| 4009 Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4010 @item substatement | |
| 4011 The first line after a conditional or loop construct. | |
| 4012 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4013 @item substatement-open | |
| 4014 The brace that opens a substatement block. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4015 Symbols}. | |
| 4016 @item substatement-label | |
| 4017 The first line after a conditional or loop construct if it's a label. | |
| 4018 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4019 @item case-label | |
| 4020 A label in a @code{switch} block. @ref{Switch Statement Symbols}. | |
| 4021 @item access-label | |
| 4022 C++ access control label. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4023 @item label | |
| 4024 Any other label. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4025 @item do-while-closure | |
| 4026 The @code{while} line that ends a @code{do}-@code{while} construct. | |
| 4027 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4028 @item else-clause | |
| 4029 The @code{else} line of an @code{if}-@code{else} construct. | |
| 4030 @ref{Conditional Construct Symbols}. | |
| 4031 @item catch-clause | |
| 4032 The @code{catch} or @code{finally} (in Java) line of a | |
| 4033 @code{try}-@code{catch} construct. @ref{Conditional Construct | |
| 4034 Symbols}. | |
| 4035 @item comment-intro | |
| 4036 A line containing only a comment introduction. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4037 @item arglist-intro | |
| 4038 The first line in an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4039 @item arglist-cont | |
| 4040 Subsequent argument list lines when no arguments follow on the same | |
| 4041 line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4042 @item arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 4043 Subsequent argument list lines when at least one argument follows on | |
| 4044 the same line as the arglist opening paren. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4045 @item arglist-close | |
| 4046 The solo close paren of an argument list. @ref{Paren List Symbols}. | |
| 4047 @item stream-op | |
| 4048 Lines continuing a stream operator (C++ only). @ref{Literal | |
| 4049 Symbols}. @c @emph{FIXME!!! Can this not be moved somewhere better?} | |
| 4050 @item inclass | |
| 4051 The line is nested inside a class definition. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4052 @item cpp-macro | |
| 4053 The start of a preprocessor macro definition. @ref{Literal Symbols}. | |
| 4054 @item cpp-define-intro | |
| 4055 The first line inside a multiline preprocessor macro if | |
| 4056 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is set. @ref{Multiline Macro | |
| 4057 Symbols}. | |
| 4058 @item cpp-macro-cont | |
| 4059 All lines inside multiline preprocessor macros if | |
| 4060 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil}. | |
| 4061 @ref{Multiline Macro Symbols}. | |
| 4062 @item friend | |
| 4063 A C++ friend declaration. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4064 @item objc-method-intro | |
| 4065 The first line of an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C | |
| 4066 Method Symbols}. | |
| 4067 @item objc-method-args-cont | |
| 4068 Lines continuing an Objective-C method definition. @ref{Objective-C | |
| 4069 Method Symbols}. | |
| 4070 @item objc-method-call-cont | |
| 4071 Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method | |
| 4072 Symbols}. | |
| 4073 @item extern-lang-open | |
| 4074 Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g. @code{extern "C" | |
| 4075 @{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4076 @item extern-lang-close | |
| 4077 Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope | |
| 4078 Symbols}. | |
| 4079 @item inextern-lang | |
| 4080 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside | |
| 4081 @code{extern} blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4082 @item namespace-open | |
| 4083 @itemx namespace-close | |
| 4084 @itemx innamespace | |
| 4085 These are analogous to the three @code{extern-lang} symbols above, but | |
| 4086 are returned for C++ namespace blocks. @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4087 @item module-open | |
| 4088 @itemx module-close | |
| 4089 @itemx inmodule | |
| 4090 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA IDL @code{module} blocks. | |
| 4091 @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4092 @item composition-open | |
| 4093 @itemx composition-close | |
| 4094 @itemx incomposition | |
| 4095 Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks. | |
| 4096 @ref{External Scope Symbols}. | |
| 4097 @item template-args-cont | |
| 4098 C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}. | |
| 4099 @item inlambda | |
| 4100 Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda | |
| 4101 (i.e. anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement | |
| 4102 Block Symbols}. | |
| 4103 @item lambda-intro-cont | |
| 4104 Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e. between the | |
| 4105 @code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode. | |
| 4106 @ref{Statement Block Symbols}. | |
| 4107 @item inexpr-statement | |
| 4108 A statement block inside an expression. The gcc C and C++ extension | |
| 4109 for this is recognized. It's also used for the special functions that | |
| 4110 take a statement block as an argument in Pike. @ref{Statement Block | |
| 4111 Symbols}. | |
| 4112 @item inexpr-class | |
| 4113 A class definition inside an expression. This is used for anonymous | |
| 4114 classes in Java. It's also used for anonymous array initializers in | |
| 4115 Java. @ref{Anonymous Class Symbol}. | |
| 4116 @end table | |
| 4117 | |
| 4118 @menu | |
| 4119 * Function Symbols:: | |
| 4120 * Class Symbols:: | |
| 4121 * Conditional Construct Symbols:: | |
| 4122 * Switch Statement Symbols:: | |
| 4123 * Brace List Symbols:: | |
| 4124 * External Scope Symbols:: | |
| 4125 * Paren List Symbols:: | |
| 4126 * Literal Symbols:: | |
| 4127 * Multiline Macro Symbols:: | |
| 4128 * Objective-C Method Symbols:: | |
| 4129 * Anonymous Class Symbol:: | |
| 4130 * Statement Block Symbols:: | |
| 4131 * K&R Symbols:: | |
| 4132 @end menu | |
| 4133 | |
| 4134 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4135 @node Function Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4136 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4137 @subsection Function Symbols | |
| 4138 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4139 | |
| 4140 This example shows a typical function declaration. | |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 @example | |
| 4143 1: void | |
| 4144 2: swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 4145 3: @{ | |
| 4146 4: int tmp = a; | |
| 4147 5: a = b; | |
| 4148 6: b = tmp; | |
| 4149 7: int ignored = | |
| 4150 8: a + b; | |
| 4151 9: @} | |
| 4152 @end example | |
| 4153 | |
| 4154 @ssindex topmost-intro | |
| 4155 @ssindex topmost-intro-cont | |
| 4156 @ssindex defun-open | |
| 4157 @ssindex defun-close | |
| 4158 @ssindex defun-block-intro | |
| 4159 Line 1 shows a @code{topmost-intro} since it is the first line that | |
| 4160 introduces a top-level construct. Line 2 is a continuation of the | |
| 4161 top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax | |
| 4162 @code{topmost-intro-cont}. Line 3 shows a @code{defun-open} since it is | |
| 4163 the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the | |
| 4164 corresponding | |
| 4165 @code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level | |
| 4166 function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e. it is | |
| 4167 the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a | |
| 4168 top-level function definition. | |
| 4169 | |
| 4170 @ssindex statement | |
| 4171 @ssindex statement-cont | |
| 4172 Lines 5, 6, and 7 are all given @code{statement} syntax since there | |
| 4173 isn't much special about them. Note however that line 8 is given | |
| 4174 @code{statement-cont} syntax since it continues the statement begun | |
| 4175 on the previous line. | |
| 4176 | |
| 4177 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4178 @node Class Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Function Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4179 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4180 @subsection Class related Symbols | |
| 4181 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4182 | |
| 4183 Here's an example which illustrates some C++ class syntactic symbols: | |
| 4184 | |
| 4185 @example | |
| 4186 1: class Bass | |
| 4187 2: : public Guitar, | |
| 4188 3: public Amplifiable | |
| 4189 4: @{ | |
| 4190 5: public: | |
| 4191 6: Bass() | |
| 4192 7: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )), | |
| 4193 8: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )), | |
| 4194 9: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )), | |
| 4195 10: gString( new BassString( 0.045 )) | |
| 4196 11: @{ | |
| 4197 12: eString.tune( 'E' ); | |
| 4198 13: aString.tune( 'A' ); | |
| 4199 14: dString.tune( 'D' ); | |
| 4200 15: gString.tune( 'G' ); | |
| 4201 16: @} | |
| 4202 17: friend class Luthier; | |
| 4203 18: @}; | |
| 4204 @end example | |
| 4205 | |
| 4206 @ssindex class-open | |
| 4207 @ssindex class-close | |
| 4208 As in the previous example, line 1 has the @code{topmost-intro} syntax. | |
| 4209 Here however, the brace that opens a C++ class definition on line 4 is | |
| 4210 assigned the @code{class-open} syntax. Note that in C++, classes, | |
| 4211 structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are | |
| 4212 very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the | |
| 4213 example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a | |
| 4214 syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even | |
| 4215 for C and Objective-C. For consistency, structs in all supported | |
| 4216 languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that | |
| 4217 the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}. | |
| 4218 Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax. | |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 @ssindex inher-intro | |
| 4221 @ssindex inher-cont | |
| 4222 Line 2 introduces the inheritance list for the class so it is assigned | |
| 4223 the @code{inher-intro} syntax, and line 3, which continues the | |
| 4224 inheritance list is given @code{inher-cont} syntax. | |
| 4225 | |
| 4226 @ssindex access-label | |
| 4227 @ssindex inclass | |
| 4228 Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 5 shows the following analysis: | |
| 4229 | |
| 4230 @example | |
| 4231 ((inclass 58) (access-label 58)) | |
| 4232 @end example | |
| 4233 | |
| 4234 @noindent | |
| 4235 The primary syntactic symbol for this line is @code{access-label} as | |
| 4236 this a label keyword that specifies access protection in C++. However, | |
| 4237 because this line is also a top-level construct inside a class | |
| 4238 definition, the analysis actually shows two syntactic symbols. The | |
| 4239 other syntactic symbol assigned to this line is @code{inclass}. | |
| 4240 Similarly, line 6 is given both @code{inclass} and @code{topmost-intro} | |
| 4241 syntax: | |
| 4242 | |
| 4243 @example | |
| 4244 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 60)) | |
| 4245 @end example | |
| 4246 | |
| 4247 @ssindex member-init-intro | |
| 4248 @ssindex member-init-cont | |
| 4249 Line 7 introduces a C++ member initialization list and as such is given | |
| 4250 @code{member-init-intro} syntax. Note that in this case it is | |
| 4251 @emph{not} assigned @code{inclass} since this is not considered a | |
| 4252 top-level construct. Lines 8 through 10 are all assigned | |
| 4253 @code{member-init-cont} since they continue the member initialization | |
| 4254 list started on line 7. | |
| 4255 | |
| 4256 @cindex in-class inline methods | |
| 4257 @ssindex inline-open | |
| 4258 @ssindex inline-close | |
| 4259 Line 11's analysis is a bit more complicated: | |
| 4260 | |
| 4261 @example | |
| 4262 ((inclass 58) (inline-open)) | |
| 4263 @end example | |
| 4264 | |
| 4265 This line is assigned a syntax of both @code{inline-open} and | |
| 4266 @code{inclass} because it opens an @dfn{in-class} C++ inline method | |
| 4267 definition. This is distinct from, but related to, the C++ notion of an | |
| 4268 inline function in that its definition occurs inside an enclosing class | |
| 4269 definition, which in C++ implies that the function should be inlined. | |
| 4270 However, if the definition of the @code{Bass} constructor appeared | |
| 4271 outside the class definition, the construct would be given the | |
| 4272 @code{defun-open} syntax, even if the keyword @code{inline} appeared | |
| 4273 before the method name, as in: | |
| 4274 | |
| 4275 @example | |
| 4276 1: class Bass | |
| 4277 2: : public Guitar, | |
| 4278 3: public Amplifiable | |
| 4279 4: @{ | |
| 4280 5: public: | |
| 4281 6: Bass(); | |
| 4282 7: @}; | |
| 4283 8: | |
| 4284 9: inline | |
| 4285 10: Bass::Bass() | |
| 4286 11: : eString( new BassString( 0.105 )), | |
| 4287 12: aString( new BassString( 0.085 )), | |
| 4288 13: dString( new BassString( 0.065 )), | |
| 4289 14: gString( new BassString( 0.045 )) | |
| 4290 15: @{ | |
| 4291 16: eString.tune( 'E' ); | |
| 4292 17: aString.tune( 'A' ); | |
| 4293 18: dString.tune( 'D' ); | |
| 4294 19: gString.tune( 'G' ); | |
| 4295 20: @} | |
| 4296 @end example | |
| 4297 | |
| 4298 @ssindex friend | |
| 4299 Returning to the previous example, line 16 is given @code{inline-close} | |
| 4300 syntax, while line 12 is given @code{defun-block-open} syntax, and lines | |
| 4301 13 through 15 are all given @code{statement} syntax. Line 17 is | |
| 4302 interesting in that its syntactic analysis list contains three | |
| 4303 elements: | |
| 4304 | |
| 4305 @example | |
| 4306 ((inclass 58) (topmost-intro 380) (friend)) | |
| 4307 @end example | |
| 4308 | |
| 4309 The @code{friend} and @code{inline-open} syntactic symbols are | |
| 4310 modifiers that do not have anchor positions. | |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 @ssindex template-args-cont | |
| 4313 Template definitions introduce yet another syntactic symbol: | |
| 4314 | |
| 4315 @example | |
| 4316 1: ThingManager <int, | |
| 4317 2: Framework::Callback *, | |
| 4318 3: Mutex> framework_callbacks; | |
| 4319 @end example | |
| 4320 | |
| 4321 Here, line 1 is analyzed as a @code{topmost-intro}, but lines 2 and 3 | |
| 4322 are both analyzed as @code{template-args-cont} lines. | |
| 4323 | |
| 4324 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4325 @node Conditional Construct Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Class Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4326 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4327 @subsection Conditional Construct Symbols | |
| 4328 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4329 | |
| 4330 Here is a (totally contrived) example which illustrates how syntax is | |
| 4331 assigned to various conditional constructs: | |
| 4332 | |
| 4333 @example | |
| 4334 1: void spam( int index ) | |
| 4335 2: @{ | |
| 4336 3: for( int i=0; i<index; i++ ) | |
| 4337 4: @{ | |
| 4338 5: if( i == 10 ) | |
| 4339 6: do_something_special(); | |
| 4340 7: else | |
| 4341 8: silly_label: | |
| 4342 9: do_something( i ); | |
| 4343 10: @} | |
| 4344 11: do @{ | |
| 4345 12: another_thing( i-- ); | |
| 4346 13: @} | |
| 4347 14: while( i > 0 ); | |
| 4348 15: @} | |
| 4349 @end example | |
| 4350 | |
| 4351 Only the lines that illustrate new syntactic symbols will be discussed. | |
| 4352 | |
| 4353 @ssindex substatement-open | |
| 4354 @ssindex statement-block-intro | |
| 4355 @ssindex block-close | |
| 4356 Line 4 has a brace which opens a conditional's substatement block. It | |
| 4357 is thus assigned @code{substatement-open} syntax, and since line 5 is | |
| 4358 the first line in the substatement block, it is assigned | |
| 4359 @code{statement-block-intro} syntax. Line 10 contains the brace | |
| 4360 that closes the inner substatement block, and is therefore given the | |
| 4361 syntax @code{block-close}@footnote{@code{block-open} is used only for | |
| 4362 ``free-standing'' blocks, and is somewhat rare (@pxref{Literal | |
| 4363 Symbols} for an example.)}. Line 13 is treated the same way. | |
| 4364 | |
| 4365 @ssindex substatement | |
| 4366 Lines 6 and 9 are also substatements of conditionals, but since they | |
| 4367 don't start blocks they are given @code{substatement} syntax | |
| 4368 instead of @code{substatement-open}. | |
| 4369 | |
| 4370 @ssindex substatement-label | |
| 4371 Line 8 contains a label, which is normally given @code{label} syntax. | |
| 4372 This one is however a bit special since it's between a conditional and | |
| 4373 its substatement. It's analyzed as @code{substatement-label} to let you | |
| 4374 handle this rather odd case differently from normal labels. | |
| 4375 | |
| 4376 @ssindex else-clause | |
| 4377 @ssindex catch-clause | |
| 4378 Line 7 start with an @code{else} that matches the @code{if} statement on | |
| 4379 line 5. It is therefore given the @code{else-clause} syntax and is | |
| 4380 anchored on the matching @code{if}. The @code{try}-@code{catch} | |
| 4381 constructs in C++ and Java are treated this way too, except that | |
| 4382 @code{catch} and (in Java) @code{finally}, are marked with | |
| 4383 @code{catch-clause}. | |
| 4384 | |
| 4385 @ssindex do-while-closure | |
| 4386 The @code{while} construct on line 14 that closes a @code{do} | |
| 4387 conditional is given the special syntax @code{do-while-closure} if it | |
| 4388 appears on a line by itself. Note that if the @code{while} appeared on | |
| 4389 the same line as the preceding close brace, that line would still have | |
| 4390 @code{block-close} syntax. | |
| 4391 | |
| 4392 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4393 @node Switch Statement Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Conditional Construct Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4394 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4395 @subsection Switch Statement Symbols | |
| 4396 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4397 | |
| 4398 Switch statements have their own set of syntactic symbols. Here's an | |
| 4399 example: | |
| 4400 | |
| 4401 @example | |
| 4402 1: void spam( enum Ingredient i ) | |
| 4403 2: @{ | |
| 4404 3: switch( i ) @{ | |
| 4405 4: case Ham: | |
| 4406 5: be_a_pig(); | |
| 4407 6: break; | |
| 4408 7: case Salt: | |
| 4409 8: drink_some_water(); | |
| 4410 9: break; | |
| 4411 10: default: | |
| 4412 11: @{ | |
| 4413 12: what_is_it(); | |
| 4414 13: break; | |
| 4415 14: @} | |
| 4416 15: @} | |
| 4417 14: @} | |
| 4418 @end example | |
| 4419 | |
| 4420 @ssindex case-label | |
| 4421 @ssindex statement-case-intro | |
| 4422 @ssindex statement-case-open | |
| 4423 Here, lines 4, 7, and 10 are all assigned @code{case-label} syntax, | |
| 4424 while lines 5 and 8 are assigned @code{statement-case-intro}. Line 11 | |
| 4425 is treated slightly differently since it contains a brace that opens a | |
| 4426 block --- it is given @code{statement-case-open} syntax. | |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4429 @node Brace List Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Switch Statement Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4430 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4431 @subsection Brace List Symbols | |
| 4432 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4433 | |
| 4434 @cindex brace lists | |
| 4435 There are a set of syntactic symbols that are used to recognize | |
| 4436 constructs inside of brace lists. A brace list is defined as an | |
| 4437 @code{enum} or aggregate initializer list, such as might statically | |
| 4438 initialize an array of structs. The three special aggregate constructs | |
| 4439 in Pike, @code{(@{ @})}, @code{([ ])} and @code{(< >)}, are treated as | |
| 4440 brace lists too. An example: | |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 @example | |
| 4443 1: static char* ingredients[] = | |
| 4444 2: @{ | |
| 4445 3: "Ham", | |
| 4446 4: "Salt", | |
| 4447 5: NULL | |
| 4448 6: @}; | |
| 4449 @end example | |
| 4450 | |
| 4451 @ssindex brace-list-open | |
| 4452 @ssindex brace-list-intro | |
| 4453 @ssindex brace-list-close | |
| 4454 @ssindex brace-list-entry | |
| 4455 Following convention, line 2 in this example is assigned | |
| 4456 @code{brace-list-open} syntax, and line 3 is assigned | |
| 4457 @code{brace-list-intro} syntax. Likewise, line 6 is assigned | |
| 4458 @code{brace-list-close} syntax. Lines 4 and 5 however, are assigned | |
| 4459 @code{brace-list-entry} syntax, as would all subsequent lines in this | |
| 4460 initializer list. | |
| 4461 | |
| 4462 @ssindex brace-entry-open | |
| 4463 Your static initializer might be initializing nested structures, for | |
| 4464 example: | |
| 4465 | |
| 4466 @example | |
| 4467 1: struct intpairs[] = | |
| 4468 2: @{ | |
| 4469 3: @{ 1, 2 @}, | |
| 4470 4: @{ | |
| 4471 5: 3, | |
| 4472 6: 4 | |
| 4473 7: @} | |
| 4474 8: @{ 1, | |
| 4475 9: 2 @}, | |
| 4476 10: @{ 3, 4 @} | |
| 4477 11: @}; | |
| 4478 @end example | |
| 4479 | |
| 4480 Here, you've already seen the analysis of lines 1, 2, 3, and 11. On | |
| 4481 line 4, things get interesting; this line is assigned | |
| 4482 @code{brace-entry-open} syntactic symbol because it's a bracelist entry | |
| 4483 line that starts with an open brace. Lines 5 and 6 (and line 9) are | |
| 4484 pretty standard, and line 7 is a @code{brace-list-close} as you'd | |
| 4485 expect. Once again, line 8 is assigned as @code{brace-entry-open} as is | |
| 4486 line 10. | |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4489 @node External Scope Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Brace List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4490 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4491 @subsection External Scope Symbols | |
| 4492 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 External language definition blocks also have their own syntactic | |
| 4495 symbols. In this example: | |
| 4496 | |
| 4497 @example | |
| 4498 1: extern "C" | |
| 4499 2: @{ | |
| 4500 3: int thing_one( int ); | |
| 4501 4: int thing_two( double ); | |
| 4502 5: @} | |
| 4503 @end example | |
| 4504 | |
| 4505 @ssindex extern-lang-open | |
| 4506 @ssindex extern-lang-close | |
| 4507 @ssindex inextern-lang | |
| 4508 @ssindex inclass | |
| 4509 @noindent | |
| 4510 line 2 is given the @code{extern-lang-open} syntax, while line 5 is given | |
| 4511 the @code{extern-lang-close} syntax. The analysis for line 3 yields: | |
| 4512 | |
| 4513 @example | |
| 4514 ((inextern-lang) (topmost-intro 14)) | |
| 4515 @end example | |
| 4516 | |
| 4517 @noindent | |
| 4518 where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to | |
| 4519 @code{inclass}. | |
| 4520 | |
| 4521 There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they | |
| 4522 are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after | |
| 4523 the keyword that introduces the block. E.g. C++ namespace blocks get | |
| 4524 the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and | |
| 4525 @code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are: | |
| 4526 | |
| 4527 @table @asis | |
| 4528 @item @code{extern-lang-open}, @code{extern-lang-close}, @code{inextern-lang} | |
| 4529 @code{extern} blocks in C and C++.@footnote{These should logically be | |
| 4530 named @code{extern-open}, @code{extern-close} and @code{inextern}, but | |
| 4531 that isn't the case for historical reasons.} | |
| 4532 | |
| 4533 @item @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close}, @code{innamespace} | |
| 4534 @ssindex namespace-open | |
| 4535 @ssindex namespace-close | |
| 4536 @ssindex innamespace | |
| 4537 @code{namespace} blocks in C++. | |
| 4538 | |
| 4539 @item @code{module-open}, @code{module-close}, @code{inmodule} | |
| 4540 @ssindex module-open | |
| 4541 @ssindex module-close | |
| 4542 @ssindex inmodule | |
| 4543 @code{module} blocks in CORBA IDL. | |
| 4544 | |
| 4545 @item @code{composition-open}, @code{composition-close}, @code{incomposition} | |
| 4546 @ssindex composition-open | |
| 4547 @ssindex composition-close | |
| 4548 @ssindex incomposition | |
| 4549 @code{composition} blocks in CORBA CIDL. | |
| 4550 @end table | |
| 4551 | |
| 4552 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4553 @node Paren List Symbols, Literal Symbols, External Scope Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4554 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4555 @subsection Parenthesis (Argument) List Symbols | |
| 4556 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4557 | |
| 4558 A number of syntactic symbols are associated with parenthesis lists, | |
| 4559 a.k.a argument lists, as found in function declarations and function | |
| 4560 calls. This example illustrates these: | |
| 4561 | |
| 4562 @example | |
| 4563 1: void a_function( int line1, | |
| 4564 2: int line2 ); | |
| 4565 3: | |
| 4566 4: void a_longer_function( | |
| 4567 5: int line1, | |
| 4568 6: int line2 | |
| 4569 7: ); | |
| 4570 8: | |
| 4571 9: void call_them( int line1, int line2 ) | |
| 4572 10: @{ | |
| 4573 11: a_function( | |
| 4574 12: line1, | |
| 4575 13: line2 | |
| 4576 14: ); | |
| 4577 15: | |
| 4578 16: a_longer_function( line1, | |
| 4579 17: line2 ); | |
| 4580 18: @} | |
| 4581 @end example | |
| 4582 | |
| 4583 @ssindex arglist-intro | |
| 4584 @ssindex arglist-close | |
| 4585 Lines 5 and 12 are assigned @code{arglist-intro} syntax since they are | |
| 4586 the first line following the open parenthesis, and lines 7 and 14 are | |
| 4587 assigned @code{arglist-close} syntax since they contain the parenthesis | |
| 4588 that closes the argument list. | |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 @ssindex arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 4591 @ssindex arglist-cont | |
| 4592 Lines that continue argument lists can be assigned one of two syntactic | |
| 4593 symbols. For example, Lines 2 and 17 | |
| 4594 are assigned @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} syntax. What this means | |
| 4595 is that they continue an argument list, but that the line containing the | |
| 4596 parenthesis that opens the list is @emph{not empty} following the open | |
| 4597 parenthesis. Contrast this against lines 6 and 13 which are assigned | |
| 4598 @code{arglist-cont} syntax. This is because the parenthesis that opens | |
| 4599 their argument lists is the last character on that line. | |
| 4600 | |
| 4601 Syntactic elements with @code{arglist-intro}, | |
| 4602 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, and @code{arglist-close} contain two | |
| 4603 buffer positions: the anchor position (the beginning of the | |
| 4604 declaration or statement) and the position of the open parenthesis. | |
| 4605 The latter position can be used in a line-up function (@pxref{Line-Up | |
| 4606 Functions}). | |
| 4607 | |
| 4608 Note that there is no @code{arglist-open} syntax. This is because any | |
| 4609 parenthesis that opens an argument list, appearing on a separate line, | |
| 4610 is assigned the @code{statement-cont} syntax instead. | |
| 4611 | |
| 4612 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4613 @node Literal Symbols, Multiline Macro Symbols, Paren List Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4614 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4615 @subsection Comment String Label and Macro Symbols | |
| 4616 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 A few miscellaneous syntactic symbols that haven't been previously | |
| 4619 covered are illustrated by this C++ example: | |
| 4620 | |
| 4621 @example | |
| 4622 1: void Bass::play( int volume ) | |
| 4623 2: const | |
| 4624 3: @{ | |
| 4625 4: /* this line starts a multiline | |
| 4626 5: * comment. This line should get `c' syntax */ | |
| 4627 6: | |
| 4628 7: char* a_multiline_string = "This line starts a multiline \ | |
| 4629 8: string. This line should get `string' syntax."; | |
| 4630 9: | |
| 4631 10: note: | |
| 4632 11: @{ | |
| 4633 12: #ifdef LOCK | |
| 4634 13: Lock acquire(); | |
| 4635 14: #endif // LOCK | |
| 4636 15: slap_pop(); | |
| 4637 16: cout << "I played " | |
| 4638 17: << "a note\n"; | |
| 4639 18: @} | |
| 4640 19: @} | |
| 4641 @end example | |
| 4642 | |
| 4643 The lines to note in this example include: | |
| 4644 | |
| 4645 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4646 @item | |
| 4647 @ssindex func-decl-cont | |
| 4648 Line 2 is assigned the @code{func-decl-cont} syntax. | |
| 4649 | |
| 4650 @item | |
| 4651 @ssindex comment-intro | |
| 4652 Line 4 is assigned both @code{defun-block-intro} @emph{and} | |
| 4653 @code{comment-intro} syntax. A syntactic element with | |
| 4654 @code{comment-intro} has no anchor point --- It is always accompanied | |
| 4655 by another syntactic element which does have one. | |
| 4656 | |
| 4657 @item | |
| 4658 @ssindex c | |
| 4659 Line 5 is assigned @code{c} syntax. | |
| 4660 | |
| 4661 @item | |
| 4662 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 4663 Line 6 which, even though it contains nothing but whitespace, is | |
| 4664 assigned @code{defun-block-intro}. Note that the appearance of the | |
| 4665 comment on lines 4 and 5 do not cause line 6 to be assigned | |
| 4666 @code{statement} syntax because comments are considered to be | |
| 4667 @dfn{syntactic whitespace}, which are ignored when analyzing | |
| 4668 code. | |
| 4669 | |
| 4670 @item | |
| 4671 @ssindex string | |
| 4672 Line 8 is assigned @code{string} syntax. | |
| 4673 | |
| 4674 @item | |
| 4675 @ssindex label | |
| 4676 Line 10 is assigned @code{label} syntax. | |
| 4677 | |
| 4678 @item | |
| 4679 @ssindex block-open | |
| 4680 Line 11 is assigned @code{block-open} as well as @code{statement} | |
| 4681 syntax. A @code{block-open} syntactic element doesn't have an anchor | |
| 4682 position, since it always appears with another syntactic element which | |
| 4683 does have one. | |
| 4684 | |
| 4685 @item | |
| 4686 @ssindex cpp-macro | |
| 4687 Lines 12 and 14 are assigned @code{cpp-macro} syntax in addition to the | |
| 4688 normal syntactic symbols (@code{statement-block-intro} and | |
| 4689 @code{statement}, respectively). Normally @code{cpp-macro} is | |
| 4690 configured to cancel out the normal syntactic context to make all | |
| 4691 preprocessor directives stick to the first column, but that's easily | |
| 4692 changed if you want preprocessor directives to be indented like the rest | |
| 4693 of the code. Like @code{comment-intro}, a syntactic element with | |
| 4694 @code{cpp-macro} doesn't contain an anchor position. | |
| 4695 | |
| 4696 @item | |
| 4697 @ssindex stream-op | |
| 4698 Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax. | |
| 4699 @end itemize | |
| 4700 | |
| 4701 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4702 @node Multiline Macro Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Literal Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4703 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4704 @subsection Multiline Macro Symbols | |
| 4705 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4706 | |
| 4707 @cindex multiline macros | |
| 4708 @cindex syntactic whitespace | |
| 4709 @ssindex cpp-define-intro | |
| 4710 @ssindex cpp-macro-cont | |
| 4711 Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like | |
| 4712 other code, i.e. the lines inside them are indented according to the | |
| 4713 syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first | |
| 4714 line inside a macro definition (i.e. the line after the starting line of | |
| 4715 the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example: | |
| 4716 | |
| 4717 @example | |
| 4718 1: #define LIST_LOOP(cons, listp) \ | |
| 4719 2: for (cons = listp; !NILP (cons); cons = XCDR (cons)) \ | |
| 4720 3: if (!CONSP (cons)) \ | |
| 4721 4: signal_error ("Invalid list format", listp); \ | |
| 4722 5: else | |
| 4723 @end example | |
| 4724 | |
| 4725 @noindent | |
| 4726 line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line | |
| 4727 of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given | |
| 4728 @code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole | |
| 4729 some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal | |
| 4730 code, i.e. @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause} | |
| 4731 on line 5. | |
| 4732 | |
| 4733 The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with | |
| 4734 @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} (@pxref{Custom Macros}). In | |
| 4735 that case, lines 2 through 5 would all be given @code{cpp-macro-cont} | |
| 4736 with an anchor position pointing to the @code{#} which starts the cpp | |
| 4737 directive@footnote{This is how @ccmode{} 5.28 and earlier analyzed | |
| 4738 macros.}. | |
| 4739 | |
| 4740 @xref{Custom Macros}, for more info about the treatment of macros. | |
| 4741 | |
| 4742 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4743 @node Objective-C Method Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Multiline Macro Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4744 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4745 @subsection Objective-C Method Symbols | |
| 4746 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4747 | |
| 4748 In Objective-C buffers, there are three additional syntactic symbols | |
| 4749 assigned to various message calling constructs. Here's an example | |
| 4750 illustrating these: | |
| 4751 | |
| 4752 @example | |
| 4753 1: - (void)setDelegate:anObject | |
| 4754 2: withStuff:stuff | |
| 4755 3: @{ | |
| 4756 4: [delegate masterWillRebind:self | |
| 4757 5: toDelegate:anObject | |
| 4758 6: withExtraStuff:stuff]; | |
| 4759 7: @} | |
| 4760 @end example | |
| 4761 | |
| 4762 @ssindex objc-method-intro | |
| 4763 @ssindex objc-method-args-cont | |
| 4764 @ssindex objc-method-call-cont | |
| 4765 Here, line 1 is assigned @code{objc-method-intro} syntax, and line 2 is | |
| 4766 assigned @code{objc-method-args-cont} syntax. Lines 5 and 6 are both | |
| 4767 assigned @code{objc-method-call-cont} syntax. | |
| 4768 | |
| 4769 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4770 @node Anonymous Class Symbol, Statement Block Symbols, Objective-C Method Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4771 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4772 @subsection Anonymous Class Symbol (Java) | |
| 4773 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4774 | |
| 4775 Java has a concept of anonymous classes which can look something like | |
| 4776 this: | |
| 4777 | |
| 4778 @example | |
| 4779 1: public void watch(Observable o) @{ | |
| 4780 2: o.addObserver(new Observer() @{ | |
| 4781 3: public void update(Observable o, Object arg) @{ | |
| 4782 4: history.addElement(arg); | |
| 4783 5: @} | |
| 4784 6: @}); | |
| 4785 7: @} | |
| 4786 @end example | |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 @ssindex inexpr-class | |
| 4789 The brace following the @code{new} operator opens the anonymous class. | |
| 4790 Lines 3 and 6 are assigned the @code{inexpr-class} syntax, besides the | |
| 4791 @code{inclass} symbol used in normal classes. Thus, the class will be | |
| 4792 indented just like a normal class, with the added indentation given to | |
| 4793 @code{inexpr-class}. An @code{inexpr-class} syntactic element doesn't | |
| 4794 have an anchor position. | |
| 4795 | |
| 4796 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4797 @node Statement Block Symbols, K&R Symbols, Anonymous Class Symbol, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4798 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4799 @subsection Statement Block Symbols | |
| 4800 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4801 | |
| 4802 There are a few occasions where a statement block might be used inside | |
| 4803 an expression. One is in C or C++ code using the gcc extension for | |
| 4804 this, e.g: | |
| 4805 | |
| 4806 @example | |
| 4807 1: int res = (@{ | |
| 4808 2: int y = foo (); int z; | |
| 4809 3: if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y; | |
| 4810 4: z; | |
| 4811 5: @}); | |
| 4812 @end example | |
| 4813 | |
| 4814 @ssindex inexpr-statement | |
| 4815 Lines 2 and 5 get the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, besides the | |
| 4816 symbols they'd get in a normal block. Therefore, the indentation put on | |
| 4817 @code{inexpr-statement} is added to the normal statement block | |
| 4818 indentation. An @code{inexpr-statement} syntactic element doesn't | |
| 4819 contain an anchor position. | |
| 4820 | |
| 4821 In Pike code, there are a few other situations where blocks occur inside | |
| 4822 statements, as illustrated here: | |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 @example | |
| 4825 1: array itgob() | |
| 4826 2: @{ | |
| 4827 3: string s = map (backtrace()[-2][3..], | |
| 4828 4: lambda | |
| 4829 5: (mixed arg) | |
| 4830 6: @{ | |
| 4831 7: return sprintf ("%t", arg); | |
| 4832 8: @}) * ", " + "\n"; | |
| 4833 9: return catch @{ | |
| 4834 10: write (s + "\n"); | |
| 4835 11: @}; | |
| 4836 12: @} | |
| 4837 @end example | |
| 4838 | |
| 4839 @ssindex inlambda | |
| 4840 @ssindex lambda-intro-cont | |
| 4841 Lines 4 through 8 contain a lambda function, which @ccmode{} recognizes | |
| 4842 by the @code{lambda} keyword. If the function argument list is put | |
| 4843 on a line of its own, as in line 5, it gets the @code{lambda-intro-cont} | |
| 4844 syntax. The function body is handled as an inline method body, with the | |
| 4845 addition of the @code{inlambda} syntactic symbol. This means that line | |
| 4846 6 gets @code{inlambda} and @code{inline-open}, and line 8 gets | |
| 4847 @code{inline-close}@footnote{You might wonder why it doesn't get | |
| 4848 @code{inlambda} too. It's because the closing brace is relative to the | |
| 4849 opening brace, which stands on its own line in this example. If the | |
| 4850 opening brace was hanging on the previous line, then the closing brace | |
| 4851 would get the @code{inlambda} syntax too to be indented correctly.}. | |
| 4852 | |
| 4853 @ssindex inexpr-statement | |
| 4854 On line 9, @code{catch} is a special function taking a statement block | |
| 4855 as its argument. The block is handled as an in-expression statement | |
| 4856 with the @code{inexpr-statement} syntax, just like the gcc extended C | |
| 4857 example above. The other similar special function, @code{gauge}, is | |
| 4858 handled like this too. | |
| 4859 | |
| 4860 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4861 @node K&R Symbols, , Statement Block Symbols, Syntactic Symbols | |
| 4862 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4863 @subsection K&R Symbols | |
| 4864 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4865 | |
| 4866 @ssindex knr-argdecl-intro | |
| 4867 @ssindex knr-argdecl | |
| 4868 Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C | |
| 4869 code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}: | |
| 4870 | |
| 4871 @example | |
| 4872 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c) | |
| 4873 2: int a; | |
| 4874 3: int b; | |
| 4875 4: int c; | |
| 4876 5: @{ | |
| 4877 6: return a + b + c; | |
| 4878 7: @} | |
| 4879 @end example | |
| 4880 | |
| 4881 Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is | |
| 4882 given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines | |
| 4883 (i.e. lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl} | |
| 4884 syntax. | |
| 4885 | |
| 4886 | |
| 4887 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4888 @node Indentation Calculation, , Syntactic Symbols, Indentation Engine Basics | |
| 4889 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4890 @section Indentation Calculation | |
| 4891 @cindex indentation | |
| 4892 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4893 | |
| 4894 Indentation for a line is calculated from the syntactic context | |
| 4895 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). | |
| 4896 | |
| 4897 First, a buffer position is found whose column will be the base for the | |
| 4898 indentation calculation. It's the anchor position in the first | |
| 4899 syntactic element that provides one that is used. If no syntactic | |
| 4900 element has an anchor position then column zero is used. | |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 Second, the syntactic symbols in each syntactic element are looked up | |
| 4903 in the @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable | |
| 4904 (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}), which is an association list of syntactic | |
| 4905 symbols and the offsets to apply for those symbols. These offsets are | |
| 4906 added together with the base column to produce the new indentation | |
| 4907 column. | |
| 4908 | |
| 4909 Let's use our two code examples above to see how this works. Here is | |
| 4910 our first example again: | |
| 4911 | |
| 4912 @example | |
| 4913 1: void swap( int& a, int& b ) | |
| 4914 2: @{ | |
| 4915 3: int tmp = a; | |
| 4916 4: a = b; | |
| 4917 5: b = tmp; | |
| 4918 6: @} | |
| 4919 @end example | |
| 4920 | |
| 4921 Let's say point is on line 3 and we hit the @key{TAB} key to reindent | |
| 4922 the line. The syntactic context for that line is: | |
| 4923 | |
| 4924 @example | |
| 4925 ((defun-block-intro 29)) | |
| 4926 @end example | |
| 4927 | |
| 4928 @noindent | |
| 4929 Since buffer position 29 is the first and only anchor position in the | |
| 4930 list, @ccmode{} goes there and asks for the current column. This brace | |
| 4931 is in column zero, so @ccmode{} uses @samp{0} as the base column. | |
| 4932 | |
| 4933 Next, @ccmode{} looks up @code{defun-block-intro} in the | |
| 4934 @code{c-offsets-alist} style variable. Let's say it finds the value | |
| 4935 @samp{4}; it adds this to the base column @samp{0}, yielding a running | |
| 4936 total indentation of 4 spaces. | |
| 4937 | |
| 4938 Since there is only one syntactic element on the list for this line, | |
| 4939 indentation calculation is complete, and the total indentation for the | |
| 4940 line is 4 spaces. | |
| 4941 | |
| 4942 Here's another example: | |
| 4943 | |
| 4944 @example | |
| 4945 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 4946 2: @{ | |
| 4947 3: if( doit ) | |
| 4948 4: @{ | |
| 4949 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 4950 6: @} | |
| 4951 7: return( val ); | |
| 4952 8: @} | |
| 4953 @end example | |
| 4954 | |
| 4955 If we were to hit @kbd{TAB} on line 4 in the above example, the same | |
| 4956 basic process is performed, despite the differences in the syntactic | |
| 4957 context. The context for this line is: | |
| 4958 | |
| 4959 @example | |
| 4960 ((substatement-open 46)) | |
| 4961 @end example | |
| 4962 | |
| 4963 Here, @ccmode{} goes to buffer position 46, which is the @samp{i} in | |
| 4964 @code{if} on line 3. This character is in the fourth column on that | |
| 4965 line so the base column is @samp{4}. Then @ccmode{} looks up the | |
| 4966 @code{substatement-open} symbol in @code{c-offsets-alist}. Let's say it | |
| 4967 finds the value @samp{4}. It's added with the base column and yields an | |
| 4968 indentation for the line of 8 spaces. | |
| 4969 | |
| 4970 Simple, huh? | |
| 4971 | |
| 4972 Actually, it's a bit more complicated than that since the entries on | |
| 4973 @code{c-offsets-alist} can be much more than plain offsets. | |
| 4974 @xref{c-offsets-alist}, for the full story. | |
| 4975 | |
| 4976 Anyway, the mode usually just does The Right Thing without you having to | |
| 4977 think about it in this much detail. But when customizing indentation, | |
| 4978 it's helpful to understand the general indentation model being used. | |
| 4979 | |
| 4980 As you configure @ccmode{}, you might want to set the variable | |
| 4981 @code{c-echo-syntactic-information-p} to non-@code{nil} so that the | |
| 4982 syntactic context and calculated offset always is echoed in the | |
| 4983 minibuffer when you hit @kbd{TAB}. | |
| 4984 | |
| 4985 | |
| 4986 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4987 @node Customizing Indentation, Custom Macros, Indentation Engine Basics, Top | |
| 4988 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 4989 @chapter Customizing Indentation | |
| 4990 @cindex customization, indentation | |
| 4991 @cindex indentation | |
| 4992 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 4993 | |
| 4994 The principal variable for customizing indentation is the style | |
| 4995 variable @code{c-offsets-alist}, which gives an @dfn{offset} (an | |
| 4996 indentation rule) for each syntactic symbol. Its structure and | |
| 4997 semantics are completely described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. The | |
| 4998 various ways you can set the variable, including the use of the | |
| 4999 @ccmode{} style system, are described in @ref{Config Basics} and its | |
| 5000 sections, in particular @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 5001 | |
| 5002 The simplest and most used kind of ``offset'' setting in | |
| 5003 @code{c-offsets-alist} is in terms of multiples of | |
| 5004 @code{c-basic-offset}: | |
| 5005 | |
| 5006 @defopt c-basic-offset | |
| 5007 @vindex basic-offset (c-) | |
| 5008 This style variable holds the basic offset between indentation levels. | |
| 5009 It's factory default is 4, but all the built-in styles set it | |
| 5010 themselves, to some value between 2 (for @code{gnu} style) and 8 (for | |
| 5011 @code{bsd}, @code{linux}, and @code{python} styles). | |
| 5012 @end defopt | |
| 5013 | |
| 5014 The most flexible ``offset'' setting you can make in | |
| 5015 @code{c-offsets-alist} is a line-up function (or even a list of them), | |
| 5016 either one supplied by @ccmode{} (@pxref{Line-Up Functions}) or one | |
| 5017 you write yourself (@pxref{Custom Line-Up}). | |
| 5018 | |
| 5019 Finally, in @ref{Other Indentation} you'll find the tool of last | |
| 5020 resort: a hook which is called after a line has been indented. You | |
| 5021 can install functions here to make ad-hoc adjustments to any line's | |
| 5022 indentation. | |
| 5023 | |
| 5024 @menu | |
| 5025 * c-offsets-alist:: | |
| 5026 * Interactive Customization:: | |
| 5027 * Line-Up Functions:: | |
| 5028 * Custom Line-Up:: | |
| 5029 * Other Indentation:: | |
| 5030 @end menu | |
| 5031 | |
| 5032 | |
| 5033 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5034 @node c-offsets-alist, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5035 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5036 @section c-offsets-alist | |
| 5037 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5038 | |
| 5039 This section explains the structure and semantics of the style | |
| 5040 variable @code{c-offset-alist}, the principal variable for configuring | |
| 5041 indentation. Details of how to set it up, and its relationship to | |
| 5042 @ccmode{}'s style system are given in @ref{Style Variables}. | |
| 5043 | |
| 5044 @defopt c-offsets-alist | |
| 5045 @vindex offsets-alist (c-) | |
| 5046 This is an alist which associates an offset with each syntactic | |
| 5047 symbol. This @dfn{offset} is a rule specifying how to indent a line | |
| 5048 whose syntactic context matches the symbol. @xref{Syntactic | |
| 5049 Analysis}. | |
| 5050 | |
| 5051 Note that the buffer-local binding of this alist in a @ccmode{} buffer | |
| 5052 contains an entry for @emph{every} syntactic symbol. Its global | |
| 5053 binding and its settings within style specifications usually contain | |
| 5054 only a few entries. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 5055 | |
| 5056 The offset specification associated with any particular syntactic | |
| 5057 symbol can be an integer, a variable name, a vector, a function or | |
| 5058 lambda expression, a list, or one of the following special symbols: | |
| 5059 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/}. The | |
| 5060 meanings of these values are described in detail below. | |
| 5061 | |
| 5062 Here is an example fragment of a @code{c-offsets-alist}, showing some | |
| 5063 of these kinds of offsets: | |
| 5064 | |
| 5065 @example | |
| 5066 ((statement . 0) | |
| 5067 (substatement . +) | |
| 5068 (cpp-macro . [0]) | |
| 5069 (topmost-intro-cont . c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont) | |
| 5070 (statement-block-intro . (add c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block | |
| 5071 c-indent-multi-line-block)) | |
| 5072 @dots{} | |
| 5073 @*) | |
| 5074 @end example | |
| 5075 @end defopt | |
| 5076 | |
| 5077 @deffn Command c-set-offset (@kbd{C-c C-o}) | |
| 5078 @findex set-offset (c-) | |
| 5079 @kindex C-c C-o | |
| 5080 This command changes the entry for a syntactic symbol in the current | |
| 5081 binding of @code{c-offsets-alist}, or it inserts a new entry if there | |
| 5082 isn't already one for that syntactic symbol. | |
| 5083 | |
| 5084 You can use @code{c-set-offsets} interactively within a @ccmode{} | |
| 5085 buffer to make experimental changes to your indentation settings. | |
| 5086 @kbd{C-c C-o} prompts you for the syntactic symbol to change | |
| 5087 (defaulting to that of the current line) and the new offset | |
| 5088 (defaulting to the current offset). | |
| 5089 | |
| 5090 @code{c-set-offsets} takes two arguments when used programmatically: | |
| 5091 @var{symbol}, the syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset}, | |
| 5092 the new offset for that syntactic element. You can call the command | |
| 5093 in your @file{.emacs} to change the global binding of | |
| 5094 @code{c-offsets-alist} (@pxref{Style Variables}); you can use it in a | |
| 5095 hook function to make changes from the current style. @ccmode{} | |
| 5096 itself uses this function when initializing styles. | |
| 5097 @end deffn | |
| 5098 | |
| 5099 @cindex offset specification | |
| 5100 The ``offset specifications'' in @code{c-offsets-alist} can be any of | |
| 5101 the following: | |
| 5102 | |
| 5103 @table @asis | |
| 5104 @item An integer | |
| 5105 The integer specifies a relative offset. All relative | |
| 5106 offsets@footnote{The syntactic context @code{@w{((defun-block-intro | |
| 5107 2724) (comment-intro))}} would likely have two relative offsets.} will | |
| 5108 be added together and used to calculate the indentation relative to an | |
| 5109 anchor position earlier in the buffer. @xref{Indentation | |
| 5110 Calculation}, for details. Most of the time, it's probably better to | |
| 5111 use one of the special symbols like @code{+} than an integer (apart | |
| 5112 from zero). | |
| 5113 | |
| 5114 @item One of the symbols @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{++}, @code{--}, @code{*}, or @code{/} | |
| 5115 These special symbols describe a relative offset in multiples of | |
| 5116 @code{c-basic-offset}: | |
| 5117 | |
| 5118 By defining a style's indentation in terms of @code{c-basic-offset}, | |
| 5119 you can change the amount of whitespace given to an indentation level | |
| 5120 while maintaining the same basic shape of your code. Here are the | |
| 5121 values that the special symbols correspond to: | |
| 5122 | |
| 5123 @table @code | |
| 5124 @item + | |
| 5125 @code{c-basic-offset} times 1 | |
| 5126 @item - | |
| 5127 @code{c-basic-offset} times -1 | |
| 5128 @item ++ | |
| 5129 @code{c-basic-offset} times 2 | |
| 5130 @item -- | |
| 5131 @code{c-basic-offset} times -2 | |
| 5132 @item * | |
| 5133 @code{c-basic-offset} times 0.5 | |
| 5134 @item / | |
| 5135 @code{c-basic-offset} times -0.5 | |
| 5136 @end table | |
| 5137 | |
| 5138 @item A vector | |
| 5139 The first element of the vector, an integer, sets the absolute | |
| 5140 indentation column. This will override any previously calculated | |
| 5141 indentation, but won't override relative indentation calculated from | |
| 5142 syntactic elements later on in the syntactic context of the line being | |
| 5143 indented. @xref{Indentation Calculation}. Any elements in the vector | |
| 5144 beyond the first will be ignored. | |
| 5145 | |
| 5146 @item A function or lambda expression | |
| 5147 The function will be called and its return value will in turn be | |
| 5148 evaluated as an offset specification. Functions are useful when more | |
| 5149 context than just the syntactic symbol is needed to get the desired | |
| 5150 indentation. @xref{Line-Up Functions}, and @ref{Custom Line-Up}, for | |
| 5151 details about them. | |
| 5152 | |
| 5153 @item A symbol with a variable binding | |
| 5154 If the symbol also has a function binding, the function takes | |
| 5155 precedence over the variable. Otherwise the value of the variable is | |
| 5156 used. It must be an integer (which is used as relative offset) or a | |
| 5157 vector (an absolute offset). | |
| 5158 | |
| 5159 @item A list | |
| 5160 The offset can also be a list containing several offset | |
| 5161 specifications; these are evaluated recursively and combined. A list | |
| 5162 is typically only useful when some of the offsets are line-up | |
| 5163 functions. A common strategy is calling a sequence of functions in | |
| 5164 turn until one of them recognizes that it is appropriate for the | |
| 5165 source line and returns a non-@code{nil} value. | |
| 5166 | |
| 5167 @code{nil} values are always ignored when the offsets are combined. | |
| 5168 The first element of the list specifies the method of combining the | |
| 5169 non-@code{nil} offsets from the remaining elements: | |
| 5170 | |
| 5171 @table @code | |
| 5172 @item first | |
| 5173 Use the first offset that doesn't evaluate to @code{nil}. Subsequent | |
| 5174 elements of the list don't get evaluated. | |
| 5175 @item min | |
| 5176 Use the minimum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or | |
| 5177 absolute - they can't be mixed. | |
| 5178 @item max | |
| 5179 Use the maximum of all the offsets. All must be either relative or | |
| 5180 absolute - they can't be mixed. | |
| 5181 @item add | |
| 5182 Add all the evaluated offsets together. Exactly one of them may be | |
| 5183 absolute, in which case the result is absolute. Any relative offsets | |
| 5184 that preceded the absolute one in the list will be ignored in that case. | |
| 5185 @end table | |
| 5186 | |
| 5187 As a compatibility measure, if the first element is none of the above | |
| 5188 then it too will be taken as an offset specification and the whole list | |
| 5189 will be combined according to the method @code{first}. | |
| 5190 @end table | |
| 5191 | |
| 5192 @vindex c-strict-syntax-p | |
| 5193 @vindex strict-syntax-p (c-) | |
| 5194 If an offset specification evaluates to @code{nil}, then a relative | |
| 5195 offset of 0 (zero) is used@footnote{There is however a variable | |
| 5196 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} that when set to non-@code{nil} will cause an | |
| 5197 error to be signaled in that case. It's now considered obsolete since | |
| 5198 it doesn't work well with some of the alignment functions that return | |
| 5199 @code{nil} instead of zero. You should therefore leave | |
| 5200 @code{c-strict-syntax-p} set to @code{nil}.}. | |
| 5201 | |
| 5202 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5203 @node Interactive Customization, Line-Up Functions, c-offsets-alist, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5204 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5205 @section Interactive Customization | |
| 5206 @cindex customization, interactive | |
| 5207 @cindex interactive customization | |
| 5208 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5209 | |
| 5210 As an example of how to customize indentation, let's change the | |
| 5211 style of this example@footnote{In this and subsequent examples, the | |
| 5212 original code is formatted using the @samp{gnu} style unless otherwise | |
| 5213 indicated. @xref{Styles}.}: | |
| 5214 | |
| 5215 @example | |
| 5216 @group | |
| 5217 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5218 2: @{ | |
| 5219 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5220 4: @{ | |
| 5221 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5222 6: @} | |
| 5223 7: return( val ); | |
| 5224 8: @} | |
| 5225 @end group | |
| 5226 @end example | |
| 5227 | |
| 5228 @noindent | |
| 5229 to: | |
| 5230 | |
| 5231 @example | |
| 5232 @group | |
| 5233 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5234 2: @{ | |
| 5235 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5236 4: @{ | |
| 5237 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5238 6: @} | |
| 5239 7: return( val ); | |
| 5240 8: @} | |
| 5241 @end group | |
| 5242 @end example | |
| 5243 | |
| 5244 In other words, we want to change the indentation of braces that open a | |
| 5245 block following a condition so that the braces line up under the | |
| 5246 conditional, instead of being indented. Notice that the construct we | |
| 5247 want to change starts on line 4. To change the indentation of a line, | |
| 5248 we need to see which syntactic symbols affect the offset calculations | |
| 5249 for that line. Hitting @kbd{C-c C-s} on line 4 yields: | |
| 5250 | |
| 5251 @example | |
| 5252 ((substatement-open 44)) | |
| 5253 @end example | |
| 5254 | |
| 5255 @noindent | |
| 5256 so we know that to change the offset of the open brace, we need to | |
| 5257 change the indentation for the @code{substatement-open} syntactic | |
| 5258 symbol. | |
| 5259 | |
| 5260 To do this interactively, just hit @kbd{C-c C-o}. This prompts | |
| 5261 you for the syntactic symbol to change, providing a reasonable default. | |
| 5262 In this case, the default is @code{substatement-open}, which is just the | |
| 5263 syntactic symbol we want to change! | |
| 5264 | |
| 5265 After you hit return, @ccmode{} will then prompt you for the new | |
| 5266 offset value, with the old value as the default. The default in this | |
| 5267 case is @samp{+}, but we want no extra indentation so enter | |
| 5268 @samp{0} and @kbd{RET}. This will associate the offset 0 with the | |
| 5269 syntactic symbol @code{substatement-open}. | |
| 5270 | |
| 5271 To check your changes quickly, just hit @kbd{C-c C-q} | |
| 5272 (@code{c-indent-defun}) to reindent the entire function. The example | |
| 5273 should now look like: | |
| 5274 | |
| 5275 @example | |
| 5276 @group | |
| 5277 1: int add( int val, int incr, int doit ) | |
| 5278 2: @{ | |
| 5279 3: if( doit ) | |
| 5280 4: @{ | |
| 5281 5: return( val + incr ); | |
| 5282 6: @} | |
| 5283 7: return( val ); | |
| 5284 8: @} | |
| 5285 @end group | |
| 5286 @end example | |
| 5287 | |
| 5288 Notice how just changing the open brace offset on line 4 is all we | |
| 5289 needed to do. Since the other affected lines are indented relative to | |
| 5290 line 4, they are automatically indented the way you'd expect. For more | |
| 5291 complicated examples, this might not always work. The general approach | |
| 5292 to take is to always start adjusting offsets for lines higher up in the | |
| 5293 file, then reindent and see if any following lines need further | |
| 5294 adjustments. | |
| 5295 | |
| 5296 @c Move this bit to "Styles" (2005/10/7) | |
| 5297 @deffn Command c-set-offset symbol offset | |
| 5298 @findex set-offset (c-) | |
| 5299 @kindex C-c C-o | |
| 5300 This is the command bound to @kbd{C-c C-o}. It provides a convenient | |
| 5301 way to set offsets on @code{c-offsets-alist} both interactively (see | |
| 5302 the example above) and from your mode hook. | |
| 5303 | |
| 5304 It takes two arguments when used programmatically: @var{symbol} is the | |
| 5305 syntactic element symbol to change and @var{offset} is the new offset | |
| 5306 for that syntactic element. | |
| 5307 @end deffn | |
| 5308 @c End of MOVE THIS BIT. | |
| 5309 | |
| 5310 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5311 @node Line-Up Functions, Custom Line-Up, Interactive Customization, Customizing Indentation | |
| 5312 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5313 @section Line-Up Functions | |
| 5314 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5315 | |
| 5316 @cindex line-up function | |
| 5317 @cindex indentation function | |
| 5318 Often there are cases when a simple offset setting on a syntactic | |
| 5319 symbol isn't enough to get the desired indentation---for example, you | |
| 5320 might want to line up a closing parenthesis with the matching opening | |
| 5321 one rather than indenting relative to its ``anchor point''. @ccmode{} | |
| 5322 provides this flexibility with @dfn{line-up functions}. | |
| 5323 | |
| 5324 The way you associate a line-up function with a syntactic symbol is | |
| 5325 described in @ref{c-offsets-alist}. @ccmode{} comes with many | |
| 5326 predefined line-up functions for common situations. If none of these | |
| 5327 does what you want, you can write your own. @xref{Custom Line-Up}. | |
| 5328 Sometimes, it is easier to tweak the standard indentation by adding a | |
| 5329 function to @code{c-special-indent-hook} (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 5330 | |
| 5331 The line-up functions haven't been adapted for AWK buffers or tested | |
| 5332 with them. Some of them might work serendipitously. There shouldn't be | |
| 5333 any problems writing custom line-up functions for AWK mode. | |
| 5334 | |
| 5335 The calling convention for line-up functions is described fully in | |
| 5336 @ref{Custom Line-Up}. Roughly speaking, the return value is either an | |
| 5337 offset itself (such as @code{+} or @code{[0]}) or it's @code{nil}, | |
| 5338 meaning ``this function is inappropriate in this case - try a | |
| 5339 different one''. @xref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 5340 | |
| 5341 The subsections below describe all the standard line-up functions, | |
| 5342 categorized by the sort of token the lining-up centers around. For | |
| 5343 each of these functions there is a ``works with'' list that indicates | |
| 5344 which syntactic symbols the function is intended to be used with. | |
| 5345 | |
| 5346 @macro workswith | |
| 5347 @emph{Works with:@ } | |
| 5348 @end macro | |
| 5349 @ifinfo | |
| 5350 @unmacro workswith | |
| 5351 @macro workswith | |
| 5352 Works with: | |
| 5353 @end macro | |
| 5354 @end ifinfo | |
| 5355 | |
| 5356 @macro sssTBasicOffset | |
| 5357 <--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c | |
| 5358 @end macro | |
| 5359 | |
| 5360 @macro sssTsssTBasicOffset | |
| 5361 <--><--> @i{c-basic-offset}@c | |
| 5362 @end macro | |
| 5363 | |
| 5364 @macro hereFn{func} | |
| 5365 <- @i{\func\}@c | |
| 5366 @end macro | |
| 5367 | |
| 5368 @c The TeX backend seems to insert extra spaces around the argument. :P | |
| 5369 @iftex | |
| 5370 @unmacro hereFn | |
| 5371 @macro hereFn{func} | |
| 5372 <-@i{\func\}@c | |
| 5373 @end macro | |
| 5374 @end iftex | |
| 5375 | |
| 5376 @menu | |
| 5377 * Brace/Paren Line-Up:: | |
| 5378 * List Line-Up:: | |
| 5379 * Operator Line-Up:: | |
| 5380 * Comment Line-Up:: | |
| 5381 * Misc Line-Up:: | |
| 5382 @end menu | |
| 5383 | |
| 5384 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5385 @node Brace/Paren Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5386 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5387 @subsection Brace and Parenthesis Line-Up Functions | |
| 5388 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5389 | |
| 5390 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for braces, | |
| 5391 parentheses and statements within brace blocks. | |
| 5392 | |
| 5393 @defun c-lineup-close-paren | |
| 5394 @findex lineup-close-paren (c-) | |
| 5395 Line up the closing paren under its corresponding open paren if the | |
| 5396 open paren is followed by code. If the open paren ends its line, no | |
| 5397 indentation is added. E.g: | |
| 5398 | |
| 5399 @example | |
| 5400 @group | |
| 5401 main (int, | |
| 5402 char ** | |
| 5403 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren} | |
| 5404 @end group | |
| 5405 @end example | |
| 5406 | |
| 5407 @noindent | |
| 5408 and | |
| 5409 | |
| 5410 @example | |
| 5411 @group | |
| 5412 main ( | |
| 5413 int, char ** | |
| 5414 ) @hereFn{c-lineup-close-paren} | |
| 5415 @end group | |
| 5416 @end example | |
| 5417 | |
| 5418 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the | |
| 5419 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is | |
| 5420 @code{c-basic-offset} instead of the open paren column. See | |
| 5421 @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure. | |
| 5422 | |
| 5423 @workswith All @code{*-close} symbols. | |
| 5424 @end defun | |
| 5425 | |
| 5426 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5427 | |
| 5428 @anchor{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren} | |
| 5429 @defun c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren | |
| 5430 @findex lineup-arglist-close-under-paren (c-) | |
| 5431 Set your @code{arglist-close} syntactic symbol to this line-up function | |
| 5432 so that parentheses that close argument lists will line up under the | |
| 5433 parenthesis that opened the argument list. It can also be used with | |
| 5434 @code{arglist-cont} and @code{arglist-cont-nonempty} to line up all | |
| 5435 lines inside a parenthesis under the open paren. | |
| 5436 | |
| 5437 As a special case, if a brace block is opened at the same line as the | |
| 5438 open parenthesis of the argument list, the indentation is | |
| 5439 @code{c-basic-offset} only. See @code{c-lineup-arglist} for further | |
| 5440 discussion of this ``DWIM'' measure. | |
| 5441 | |
| 5442 @workswith Almost all symbols, but are typically most useful on | |
| 5443 @code{arglist-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, @code{arglist-cont} and | |
| 5444 @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5445 @end defun | |
| 5446 | |
| 5447 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5448 | |
| 5449 @defun c-indent-one-line-block | |
| 5450 @findex indent-one-line-block (c-) | |
| 5451 Indent a one line block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g: | |
| 5452 | |
| 5453 @example | |
| 5454 @group | |
| 5455 if (n > 0) | |
| 5456 @{m+=n; n=0;@} @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block} | |
| 5457 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5458 @end group | |
| 5459 @end example | |
| 5460 | |
| 5461 @noindent | |
| 5462 and | |
| 5463 | |
| 5464 @example | |
| 5465 @group | |
| 5466 if (n > 0) | |
| 5467 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-one-line-block} | |
| 5468 m+=n; n=0; | |
| 5469 @} | |
| 5470 @end group | |
| 5471 @end example | |
| 5472 | |
| 5473 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters. | |
| 5474 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a one line block, | |
| 5475 which makes the function usable in list expressions. | |
| 5476 | |
| 5477 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the | |
| 5478 @code{-open} symbols. | |
| 5479 @end defun | |
| 5480 | |
| 5481 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5482 | |
| 5483 @defun c-indent-multi-line-block | |
| 5484 @findex indent-multi-line-block (c-) | |
| 5485 Indent a multiline block @code{c-basic-offset} extra. E.g: | |
| 5486 | |
| 5487 @example | |
| 5488 @group | |
| 5489 int *foo[] = @{ | |
| 5490 NULL, | |
| 5491 @{17@}, @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block} | |
| 5492 @end group | |
| 5493 @end example | |
| 5494 | |
| 5495 @noindent | |
| 5496 and | |
| 5497 | |
| 5498 @example | |
| 5499 @group | |
| 5500 int *foo[] = @{ | |
| 5501 NULL, | |
| 5502 @{ @hereFn{c-indent-multi-line-block} | |
| 5503 17 | |
| 5504 @}, | |
| 5505 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5506 @end group | |
| 5507 @end example | |
| 5508 | |
| 5509 The block may be surrounded by any kind of parenthesis characters. | |
| 5510 @code{nil} is returned if the line doesn't start with a multiline | |
| 5511 block, which makes the function usable in list expressions. | |
| 5512 | |
| 5513 @workswith Almost all syntactic symbols, but most useful on the | |
| 5514 @code{-open} symbols. | |
| 5515 @end defun | |
| 5516 | |
| 5517 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5518 | |
| 5519 @defun c-lineup-runin-statements | |
| 5520 @findex lineup-runin-statements (c-) | |
| 5521 Line up statements for coding standards which place the first statement | |
| 5522 in a block on the same line as the block opening brace@footnote{Run-in | |
| 5523 style doesn't really work too well. You might need to write your own | |
| 5524 custom line-up functions to better support this style.}. E.g: | |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 @example | |
| 5527 @group | |
| 5528 int main() | |
| 5529 @{ puts ("Hello!"); | |
| 5530 return 0; @hereFn{c-lineup-runin-statements} | |
| 5531 @} | |
| 5532 @end group | |
| 5533 @end example | |
| 5534 | |
| 5535 If there is no statement after the opening brace to align with, | |
| 5536 @code{nil} is returned. This makes the function usable in list | |
| 5537 expressions. | |
| 5538 | |
| 5539 @workswith The @code{statement} syntactic symbol. | |
| 5540 @end defun | |
| 5541 | |
| 5542 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5543 | |
| 5544 @defun c-lineup-inexpr-block | |
| 5545 @findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-) | |
| 5546 This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the | |
| 5547 whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g. for Java | |
| 5548 anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword, | |
| 5549 and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda} | |
| 5550 keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a | |
| 5551 construct. | |
| 5552 | |
| 5553 @workswith @code{inlambda}, @code{inexpr-statement}, | |
| 5554 @code{inexpr-class}. | |
| 5555 @end defun | |
| 5556 | |
| 5557 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5558 | |
| 5559 @defun c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks | |
| 5560 @findex lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks (c-) | |
| 5561 Compensate for Whitesmith style indentation of blocks. Due to the way | |
| 5562 @ccmode{} calculates anchor positions for normal lines inside blocks, | |
| 5563 this function is necessary for those lines to get correct Whitesmith | |
| 5564 style indentation. Consider the following examples: | |
| 5565 | |
| 5566 @example | |
| 5567 @group | |
| 5568 int foo() | |
| 5569 @{ | |
| 5570 a; | |
| 5571 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks} | |
| 5572 @end group | |
| 5573 @end example | |
| 5574 | |
| 5575 @example | |
| 5576 @group | |
| 5577 int foo() | |
| 5578 @{ | |
| 5579 @{ | |
| 5580 a; | |
| 5581 @} | |
| 5582 x; @hereFn{c-lineup-after-whitesmith-blocks} | |
| 5583 @end group | |
| 5584 @end example | |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 The fact that the line with @code{x} is preceded by a Whitesmith style | |
| 5587 indented block in the latter case and not the first should not affect | |
| 5588 its indentation. But since CC Mode in cases like this uses the | |
| 5589 indentation of the preceding statement as anchor position, the @code{x} | |
| 5590 would in the second case be indented too much if the offset for | |
| 5591 @code{statement} was set simply to zero. | |
| 5592 | |
| 5593 This lineup function corrects for this situation by detecting if the | |
| 5594 anchor position is at an open paren character. In that case, it instead | |
| 5595 indents relative to the surrounding block just like | |
| 5596 @code{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block}. | |
| 5597 | |
| 5598 @workswith @code{brace-list-entry}, @code{brace-entry-open}, | |
| 5599 @code{statement}, @code{arglist-cont}. | |
| 5600 @end defun | |
| 5601 | |
| 5602 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5603 | |
| 5604 @defun c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block | |
| 5605 @findex lineup-whitesmith-in-block (c-) | |
| 5606 Line up lines inside a block in Whitesmith style. It's done in a way | |
| 5607 that works both when the opening brace hangs and when it doesn't. E.g: | |
| 5608 | |
| 5609 @example | |
| 5610 @group | |
| 5611 something | |
| 5612 @{ | |
| 5613 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block} | |
| 5614 @} | |
| 5615 @end group | |
| 5616 @end example | |
| 5617 | |
| 5618 @noindent | |
| 5619 and | |
| 5620 | |
| 5621 @example | |
| 5622 @group | |
| 5623 something @{ | |
| 5624 foo; @hereFn{c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block} | |
| 5625 @} | |
| 5626 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5627 @end group | |
| 5628 @end example | |
| 5629 | |
| 5630 In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second | |
| 5631 @code{c-basic-offset} is added. | |
| 5632 | |
| 5633 @workswith @code{defun-close}, @code{defun-block-intro}, | |
| 5634 @code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, | |
| 5635 @code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro}, | |
| 5636 @code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, | |
| 5637 @code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g. @code{inclass} | |
| 5638 and @code{inextern-lang}. | |
| 5639 @end defun | |
| 5640 | |
| 5641 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5642 @node List Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Brace/Paren Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5643 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5644 @subsection List Line-Up Functions | |
| 5645 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5646 | |
| 5647 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which | |
| 5648 form lists of items, usually separated by commas. | |
| 5649 | |
| 5650 The function @ref{c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren}, which is mainly | |
| 5651 for indenting a close parenthesis, is also useful for the lines | |
| 5652 contained within parentheses. | |
| 5653 | |
| 5654 @defun c-lineup-arglist | |
| 5655 @findex lineup-arglist (c-) | |
| 5656 Line up the current argument line under the first argument. | |
| 5657 | |
| 5658 As a special case, if an argument on the same line as the open | |
| 5659 parenthesis starts with a brace block opener, the indentation is | |
| 5660 @code{c-basic-offset} only. This is intended as a ``DWIM'' measure in | |
| 5661 cases like macros that contain statement blocks, e.g: | |
| 5662 | |
| 5663 @example | |
| 5664 @group | |
| 5665 A_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME (@{ | |
| 5666 some (code, with + long, lines * in[it]); | |
| 5667 @}); | |
| 5668 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5669 @end group | |
| 5670 @end example | |
| 5671 | |
| 5672 This is motivated partly because it's more in line with how code | |
| 5673 blocks are handled, and partly since it approximates the behavior of | |
| 5674 earlier CC Mode versions, which due to inaccurate analysis tended to | |
| 5675 indent such cases this way. | |
| 5676 | |
| 5677 @workswith @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, @code{arglist-close}. | |
| 5678 @end defun | |
| 5679 | |
| 5680 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5681 | |
| 5682 @defun c-lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren | |
| 5683 @findex lineup-arglist-intro-after-paren (c-) | |
| 5684 Line up a line to just after the open paren of the surrounding paren or | |
| 5685 brace block. | |
| 5686 | |
| 5687 @workswith @code{defun-block-intro}, @code{brace-list-intro}, | |
| 5688 @code{statement-block-intro}, @code{statement-case-intro}, | |
| 5689 @code{arglist-intro}. | |
| 5690 @end defun | |
| 5691 | |
| 5692 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5693 | |
| 5694 @defun c-lineup-multi-inher | |
| 5695 @findex lineup-multi-inher (c-) | |
| 5696 Line up the classes in C++ multiple inheritance clauses and member | |
| 5697 initializers under each other. E.g: | |
| 5698 | |
| 5699 @example | |
| 5700 @group | |
| 5701 Foo::Foo (int a, int b): | |
| 5702 Cyphr (a), | |
| 5703 Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5704 @end group | |
| 5705 @end example | |
| 5706 | |
| 5707 @noindent | |
| 5708 and | |
| 5709 | |
| 5710 @example | |
| 5711 @group | |
| 5712 class Foo | |
| 5713 : public Cyphr, | |
| 5714 public Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5715 @end group | |
| 5716 @end example | |
| 5717 | |
| 5718 @noindent | |
| 5719 and | |
| 5720 | |
| 5721 @example | |
| 5722 @group | |
| 5723 Foo::Foo (int a, int b) | |
| 5724 : Cyphr (a) | |
| 5725 , Bar (b) @hereFn{c-lineup-multi-inher} | |
| 5726 @end group | |
| 5727 @end example | |
| 5728 | |
| 5729 @workswith @code{inher-cont}, @code{member-init-cont}. | |
| 5730 @end defun | |
| 5731 | |
| 5732 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5733 | |
| 5734 @defun c-lineup-java-inher | |
| 5735 @findex lineup-java-inher (c-) | |
| 5736 Line up Java implements and extends declarations. If class names | |
| 5737 follow on the same line as the @samp{implements}/@samp{extends} | |
| 5738 keyword, they are lined up under each other. Otherwise, they are | |
| 5739 indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the column of the keyword. | |
| 5740 E.g: | |
| 5741 | |
| 5742 @example | |
| 5743 @group | |
| 5744 class Foo | |
| 5745 extends | |
| 5746 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher} | |
| 5747 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5748 @end group | |
| 5749 @end example | |
| 5750 | |
| 5751 @noindent | |
| 5752 and | |
| 5753 | |
| 5754 @example | |
| 5755 @group | |
| 5756 class Foo | |
| 5757 extends Cyphr, | |
| 5758 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-inher} | |
| 5759 @end group | |
| 5760 @end example | |
| 5761 | |
| 5762 @workswith @code{inher-cont}. | |
| 5763 @end defun | |
| 5764 | |
| 5765 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5766 | |
| 5767 @defun c-lineup-java-throws | |
| 5768 @findex lineup-java-throws (c-) | |
| 5769 Line up Java throws declarations. If exception names follow on the | |
| 5770 same line as the throws keyword, they are lined up under each other. | |
| 5771 Otherwise, they are indented by adding @code{c-basic-offset} to the | |
| 5772 column of the @samp{throws} keyword. The @samp{throws} keyword itself | |
| 5773 is also indented by @code{c-basic-offset} from the function declaration | |
| 5774 start if it doesn't hang. E.g: | |
| 5775 | |
| 5776 @example | |
| 5777 @group | |
| 5778 int foo() | |
| 5779 throws @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5780 Bar @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5781 @sssTsssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 5782 @end group | |
| 5783 @end example | |
| 5784 | |
| 5785 @noindent | |
| 5786 and | |
| 5787 | |
| 5788 @example | |
| 5789 @group | |
| 5790 int foo() throws Cyphr, | |
| 5791 Bar, @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5792 Vlod @hereFn{c-lineup-java-throws} | |
| 5793 @end group | |
| 5794 @end example | |
| 5795 | |
| 5796 @workswith @code{func-decl-cont}. | |
| 5797 @end defun | |
| 5798 | |
| 5799 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5800 | |
| 5801 @defun c-lineup-template-args | |
| 5802 @findex lineup-template-args (c-) | |
| 5803 Line up the arguments of a template argument list under each other, but | |
| 5804 only in the case where the first argument is on the same line as the | |
| 5805 opening @samp{<}. | |
| 5806 | |
| 5807 To allow this function to be used in a list expression, @code{nil} is | |
| 5808 returned if there's no template argument on the first line. | |
| 5809 | |
| 5810 @workswith @code{template-args-cont}. | |
| 5811 @end defun | |
| 5812 | |
| 5813 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5814 | |
| 5815 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-call | |
| 5816 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-call (c-) | |
| 5817 For Objective-C code, line up selector args as Emacs Lisp mode does | |
| 5818 with function args: go to the position right after the message receiver, | |
| 5819 and if you are at the end of the line, indent the current line | |
| 5820 c-basic-offset columns from the opening bracket; otherwise you are | |
| 5821 looking at the first character of the first method call argument, so | |
| 5822 lineup the current line with it. | |
| 5823 | |
| 5824 @workswith @code{objc-method-call-cont}. | |
| 5825 @end defun | |
| 5826 | |
| 5827 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5828 | |
| 5829 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args | |
| 5830 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args (c-) | |
| 5831 For Objective-C code, line up the colons that separate args. The colon | |
| 5832 on the current line is aligned with the one on the first line. | |
| 5833 | |
| 5834 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}. | |
| 5835 @end defun | |
| 5836 | |
| 5837 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5838 | |
| 5839 @defun c-lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 | |
| 5840 @findex lineup-ObjC-method-args-2 (c-) | |
| 5841 Similar to @code{c-lineup-ObjC-method-args} but lines up the colon on | |
| 5842 the current line with the colon on the previous line. | |
| 5843 | |
| 5844 @workswith @code{objc-method-args-cont}. | |
| 5845 @end defun | |
| 5846 | |
| 5847 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5848 @node Operator Line-Up, Comment Line-Up, List Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5849 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5850 @subsection Operator Line-Up Functions | |
| 5851 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5852 | |
| 5853 The line-up functions here calculate the indentation for lines which | |
| 5854 start with an operator, by lining it up with something on the previous | |
| 5855 line. | |
| 5856 | |
| 5857 @defun c-lineup-argcont | |
| 5858 @findex lineup-argcont (c-) | |
| 5859 Line up a continued argument. E.g: | |
| 5860 | |
| 5861 @example | |
| 5862 @group | |
| 5863 foo (xyz, aaa + bbb + ccc | |
| 5864 + ddd + eee + fff); @hereFn{c-lineup-argcont} | |
| 5865 @end group | |
| 5866 @end example | |
| 5867 | |
| 5868 Only continuation lines like this are touched, @code{nil} is returned on | |
| 5869 lines which are the start of an argument. | |
| 5870 | |
|
96449
80392a5671b7
American English spelling fixes.
Glenn Morris <rgm@gnu.org>
parents:
95936
diff
changeset
|
5871 Within a gcc @code{asm} block, @code{:} is recognized as an argument |
| 84286 | 5872 separator, but of course only between operand specifications, not in the |
| 5873 expressions for the operands. | |
| 5874 | |
| 5875 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5876 @end defun | |
| 5877 | |
| 5878 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5879 | |
| 5880 @defun c-lineup-arglist-operators | |
| 5881 @findex lineup-arglist-operators (c-) | |
| 5882 Line up lines starting with an infix operator under the open paren. | |
| 5883 Return @code{nil} on lines that don't start with an operator, to leave | |
| 5884 those cases to other line-up functions. Example: | |
| 5885 | |
| 5886 @example | |
| 5887 @group | |
| 5888 if ( x < 10 | |
| 5889 || at_limit (x, @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators} | |
| 5890 list) @hereFn{c-lineup-arglist-operators@r{ returns nil}} | |
| 5891 ) | |
| 5892 @end group | |
| 5893 @end example | |
| 5894 | |
| 5895 Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix | |
| 5896 operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup | |
| 5897 settings, e.g. as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a | |
| 5898 suggestion to get a consistent style): | |
| 5899 | |
| 5900 @example | |
| 5901 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont | |
| 5902 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators 0)) | |
| 5903 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty | |
| 5904 '(c-lineup-arglist-operators c-lineup-arglist)) | |
| 5905 (c-set-offset 'arglist-close | |
| 5906 '(c-lineup-arglist-close-under-paren)) | |
| 5907 @end example | |
| 5908 | |
| 5909 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5910 @end defun | |
| 5911 | |
| 5912 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5913 | |
| 5914 @defun c-lineup-assignments | |
| 5915 @findex lineup-assignments (c-) | |
| 5916 Line up the current line after the assignment operator on the first line | |
| 5917 in the statement. If there isn't any, return nil to allow stacking with | |
| 5918 other line-up functions. If the current line contains an assignment | |
| 5919 operator too, try to align it with the first one. | |
| 5920 | |
| 5921 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5922 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5923 | |
| 5924 @end defun | |
| 5925 | |
| 5926 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5927 | |
| 5928 @defun c-lineup-math | |
| 5929 @findex lineup-math (c-) | |
| 5930 Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset} | |
| 5931 if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e. this | |
| 5932 function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments | |
| 5933 +)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations. | |
| 5934 | |
| 5935 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5936 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5937 @end defun | |
| 5938 | |
| 5939 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5940 | |
| 5941 @defun c-lineup-cascaded-calls | |
| 5942 @findex lineup-cascaded-calls (c-) | |
| 5943 Line up ``cascaded calls'' under each other. If the line begins with | |
| 5944 @code{->} or @code{.} and the preceding line ends with one or more | |
| 5945 function calls preceded by the same token, then the arrow is lined up | |
| 5946 with the first of those tokens. E.g: | |
| 5947 | |
| 5948 @example | |
| 5949 @group | |
| 5950 r = proc->add(17)->add(18) | |
| 5951 ->add(19) + @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls} | |
| 5952 offset; @hereFn{c-lineup-cascaded-calls@r{ (inactive)}} | |
| 5953 @end group | |
| 5954 @end example | |
| 5955 | |
| 5956 In any other situation @code{nil} is returned to allow use in list | |
| 5957 expressions. | |
| 5958 | |
| 5959 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5960 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5961 @end defun | |
| 5962 | |
| 5963 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5964 | |
| 5965 @defun c-lineup-streamop | |
| 5966 @findex lineup-streamop (c-) | |
| 5967 Line up C++ stream operators (i.e. @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}). | |
| 5968 | |
| 5969 @workswith @code{stream-op}. | |
| 5970 @end defun | |
| 5971 | |
| 5972 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 5973 | |
| 5974 @defun c-lineup-string-cont | |
| 5975 @findex lineup-string-cont (c-) | |
| 5976 Line up a continued string under the one it continues. A continued | |
| 5977 string in this sense is where a string literal follows directly after | |
| 5978 another one. E.g: | |
| 5979 | |
| 5980 @example | |
| 5981 @group | |
| 5982 result = prefix + "A message " | |
| 5983 "string."; @hereFn{c-lineup-string-cont} | |
| 5984 @end group | |
| 5985 @end example | |
| 5986 | |
| 5987 @code{nil} is returned in other situations, to allow stacking with other | |
| 5988 lineup functions. | |
| 5989 | |
| 5990 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}, @code{statement-cont}, | |
| 5991 @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 5992 @end defun | |
| 5993 | |
| 5994 | |
| 5995 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 5996 @node Comment Line-Up, Misc Line-Up, Operator Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 5997 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 5998 @subsection Comment Line-Up Functions | |
| 5999 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6000 | |
| 6001 The lineup functions here calculate the indentation for several types | |
| 6002 of comment structure. | |
| 6003 | |
| 6004 @defun c-lineup-C-comments | |
| 6005 @findex lineup-C-comments (c-) | |
| 6006 Line up C block comment continuation lines. Various heuristics are used | |
| 6007 to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples: | |
| 6008 | |
| 6009 @example | |
| 6010 @group | |
| 6011 /* /** /* | |
| 6012 * text * text text | |
| 6013 */ */ */ | |
| 6014 @end group | |
| 6015 @end example | |
| 6016 | |
| 6017 @example | |
| 6018 @group | |
| 6019 /* text /* /** | |
| 6020 text ** text ** text | |
| 6021 */ */ */ | |
| 6022 @end group | |
| 6023 @end example | |
| 6024 | |
| 6025 @example | |
| 6026 @group | |
| 6027 /************************************************** | |
| 6028 * text | |
| 6029 *************************************************/ | |
| 6030 @end group | |
| 6031 @end example | |
| 6032 | |
| 6033 @vindex comment-start-skip | |
| 6034 @example | |
| 6035 @group | |
| 6036 /************************************************** | |
| 6037 Free form text comments: | |
| 6038 In comments with a long delimiter line at the | |
| 6039 start, the indentation is kept unchanged for lines | |
| 6040 that start with an empty comment line prefix. The | |
| 6041 delimiter line is whatever matches the | |
| 6042 @code{comment-start-skip} regexp. | |
| 6043 **************************************************/ | |
| 6044 @end group | |
| 6045 @end example | |
| 6046 | |
| 6047 The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize | |
| 6048 the comment line prefix, e.g. the @samp{*} that usually starts every | |
| 6049 line inside a comment. | |
| 6050 | |
| 6051 @workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol. | |
| 6052 @end defun | |
| 6053 | |
| 6054 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6055 | |
| 6056 @defun c-lineup-comment | |
| 6057 @findex lineup-comment (c-) | |
| 6058 Line up a comment-only line according to the style variable | |
| 6059 @code{c-comment-only-line-offset}. If the comment is lined up with a | |
| 6060 comment starter on the previous line, that alignment is preserved. | |
| 6061 | |
| 6062 @defopt c-comment-only-line-offset | |
| 6063 @vindex comment-only-line-offset (c-) | |
| 6064 This style variable specifies the extra offset for the line. It can | |
| 6065 contain an integer or a cons cell of the form | |
| 6066 | |
| 6067 @example | |
| 6068 (@r{@var{non-anchored-offset}} . @r{@var{anchored-offset}}) | |
| 6069 @end example | |
| 6070 | |
| 6071 @noindent | |
| 6072 where @var{non-anchored-offset} is the amount of offset given to | |
| 6073 non-column-zero anchored lines, and @var{anchored-offset} is the amount | |
| 6074 of offset to give column-zero anchored lines. Just an integer as value | |
| 6075 is equivalent to @code{(@r{@var{value}} . -1000)}. | |
| 6076 @end defopt | |
| 6077 | |
| 6078 @workswith @code{comment-intro}. | |
| 6079 @end defun | |
| 6080 | |
| 6081 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6082 | |
| 6083 @defun c-lineup-knr-region-comment | |
| 6084 @findex lineup-knr-region-comment (c-) | |
| 6085 Line up a comment in the ``K&R region'' with the declaration. That is | |
| 6086 the region between the function or class header and the beginning of the | |
| 6087 block. E.g: | |
| 6088 | |
| 6089 @example | |
| 6090 @group | |
| 6091 int main() | |
| 6092 /* Called at startup. */ @hereFn{c-lineup-knr-region-comment} | |
| 6093 @{ | |
| 6094 return 0; | |
| 6095 @} | |
| 6096 @end group | |
| 6097 @end example | |
| 6098 | |
| 6099 Return @code{nil} if called in any other situation, to be useful in list | |
| 6100 expressions. | |
| 6101 | |
| 6102 @workswith @code{comment-intro}. | |
| 6103 @end defun | |
| 6104 | |
| 6105 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6106 @node Misc Line-Up, , Comment Line-Up, Line-Up Functions | |
| 6107 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6108 @subsection Miscellaneous Line-Up Functions | |
| 6109 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6110 | |
| 6111 The line-up functions here are the odds and ends which didn't fit into | |
| 6112 any earlier category. | |
| 6113 | |
| 6114 @defun c-lineup-dont-change | |
| 6115 @findex lineup-dont-change (c-) | |
| 6116 This lineup function makes the line stay at whatever indentation it | |
| 6117 already has; think of it as an identity function for lineups. | |
| 6118 | |
| 6119 @workswith Any syntactic symbol. | |
| 6120 @end defun | |
| 6121 | |
| 6122 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6123 | |
| 6124 @defun c-lineup-cpp-define | |
| 6125 @findex lineup-cpp-define (c-) | |
| 6126 Line up macro continuation lines according to the indentation of the | |
| 6127 construct preceding the macro. E.g: | |
| 6128 | |
| 6129 @example | |
| 6130 @group | |
| 6131 const char msg[] = @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}} | |
| 6132 \"Some text.\"; | |
| 6133 | |
| 6134 #define X(A, B) \ | |
| 6135 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6136 printf (A, B); \ | |
| 6137 @} while (0) | |
| 6138 @end group | |
| 6139 @end example | |
| 6140 | |
| 6141 @noindent | |
| 6142 and: | |
| 6143 | |
| 6144 @example | |
| 6145 @group | |
| 6146 int dribble() @{ | |
| 6147 if (!running) @hereFn{@r{The beginning of the preceding construct.}} | |
| 6148 error(\"Not running!\"); | |
| 6149 | |
| 6150 #define X(A, B) \ | |
| 6151 do @{ \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6152 printf (A, B); \ | |
| 6153 @} while (0) | |
| 6154 @end group | |
| 6155 @end example | |
| 6156 | |
| 6157 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the | |
| 6158 function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to | |
| 6159 allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g. in the following cases, | |
| 6160 @code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the | |
| 6161 @code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs | |
| 6162 on the @samp{#define} line: | |
| 6163 | |
| 6164 @example | |
| 6165 @group | |
| 6166 const char msg[] = | |
| 6167 \"Some text.\"; | |
| 6168 | |
| 6169 #define X(A, B) do @{ \ | |
| 6170 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6171 this->refs++; \ | |
| 6172 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6173 @end group | |
| 6174 @end example | |
| 6175 | |
| 6176 @noindent | |
| 6177 and: | |
| 6178 | |
| 6179 @example | |
| 6180 @group | |
| 6181 int dribble() @{ | |
| 6182 if (!running) | |
| 6183 error(\"Not running!\"); | |
| 6184 | |
| 6185 #define X(A, B) do @{ \ | |
| 6186 printf (A, B); \ @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6187 this->refs++; \ | |
| 6188 @} while (0) @hereFn{c-lineup-cpp-define} | |
| 6189 @end group | |
| 6190 @end example | |
| 6191 | |
| 6192 The relative indentation returned by @code{c-lineup-cpp-define} is zero | |
| 6193 and two, respectively, on the two lines in each of these examples. They | |
| 6194 are then added to the two column indentation that | |
| 6195 @code{statement-block-intro} gives in both cases here. | |
| 6196 | |
| 6197 If the relative indentation is zero, then @code{nil} is returned | |
| 6198 instead. That is useful in a list expression to specify the default | |
| 6199 indentation on the top level. | |
| 6200 | |
| 6201 If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is @code{nil} then this | |
| 6202 function keeps the current indentation, except for empty lines (ignoring | |
| 6203 the ending backslash) where it takes the indentation from the closest | |
| 6204 preceding nonempty line in the macro. If there's no such line in the | |
| 6205 macro then the indentation is taken from the construct preceding it, as | |
| 6206 described above. | |
| 6207 | |
| 6208 @workswith @code{cpp-define-intro}. | |
| 6209 @end defun | |
| 6210 | |
| 6211 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6212 | |
| 6213 @defun c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg | |
| 6214 @findex lineup-gcc-asm-reg (c-) | |
| 6215 Line up a gcc asm register under one on a previous line. | |
| 6216 | |
| 6217 @example | |
| 6218 @group | |
| 6219 asm ("foo %1, %0\n" | |
| 6220 "bar %0, %1" | |
| 6221 : "=r" (w), | |
| 6222 "=r" (x) | |
| 6223 : "0" (y), | |
| 6224 "1" (z)); | |
| 6225 @end group | |
| 6226 @end example | |
| 6227 | |
| 6228 The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the | |
| 6229 @samp{w} line, and similarly @samp{z} under @samp{y}. | |
| 6230 | |
| 6231 This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to | |
| 6232 those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual | |
| 6233 arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of | |
| 6234 arglist lineups, e.g. | |
| 6235 | |
| 6236 @example | |
| 6237 (c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist) | |
| 6238 @end example | |
| 6239 | |
| 6240 @workswith @code{arglist-cont}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}. | |
| 6241 @end defun | |
| 6242 | |
| 6243 @comment ------------------------------------------------------------ | |
| 6244 | |
| 6245 @defun c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont | |
| 6246 @findex lineup-topmost-intro-cont (c-) | |
| 6247 Line up declaration continuation lines zero or one indentation | |
| 6248 step@footnote{This function is mainly provided to mimic the behavior of | |
| 6249 CC Mode 5.28 and earlier where this case wasn't handled consistently so | |
| 6250 that those lines could be analyzed as either topmost-intro-cont or | |
| 6251 statement-cont. It's used for @code{topmost-intro-cont} by default, but | |
| 6252 you might consider using @code{+} instead.}. For lines preceding a | |
| 6253 definition, zero is used. For other lines, @code{c-basic-offset} is | |
| 6254 added to the indentation. E.g: | |
| 6255 | |
| 6256 @example | |
| 6257 @group | |
| 6258 int | |
| 6259 neg (int i) @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6260 @{ | |
| 6261 return -i; | |
| 6262 @} | |
| 6263 @end group | |
| 6264 @end example | |
| 6265 | |
| 6266 @noindent | |
| 6267 and | |
| 6268 | |
| 6269 @example | |
| 6270 @group | |
| 6271 struct | |
| 6272 larch @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6273 @{ | |
| 6274 double height; | |
| 6275 @} | |
| 6276 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6277 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6278 @sssTBasicOffset{} | |
| 6279 @end group | |
| 6280 @end example | |
| 6281 | |
| 6282 @noindent | |
| 6283 and | |
| 6284 | |
| 6285 @example | |
| 6286 @group | |
| 6287 struct larch | |
| 6288 the_larch, @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6289 another_larch; @hereFn{c-lineup-topmost-intro-cont} | |
| 6290 @end group | |
| 6291 @end example | |
| 6292 | |
| 6293 @workswith @code{topmost-intro-cont}. | |
| 6294 @end defun | |
| 6295 | |
| 6296 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6297 @node Custom Line-Up, Other Indentation, Line-Up Functions, Customizing Indentation | |
| 6298 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6299 @section Custom Line-Up Functions | |
| 6300 @cindex customization, indentation functions | |
| 6301 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6302 | |
| 6303 The most flexible way to customize indentation is by writing custom | |
| 6304 line-up functions, and associating them with specific syntactic | |
| 6305 symbols (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}). Depending on the effect you want, | |
| 6306 it might be better to write a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function | |
| 6307 rather than a line-up function (@pxref{Other Indentation}). | |
| 6308 | |
| 6309 @ccmode{} comes with an extensive set of predefined line-up functions, | |
| 6310 not all of which are used by the default styles. So there's a good | |
| 6311 chance the function you want already exists. @xref{Line-Up | |
| 6312 Functions}, for a list of them. If you write your own line-up | |
| 6313 function, it's probably a good idea to start working from one of these | |
| 6314 predefined functions, which can be found in the file | |
| 6315 @file{cc-align.el}. If you have written a line-up function that you | |
| 6316 think is generally useful, you're very welcome to contribute it; | |
| 6317 please contact @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. | |
| 6318 | |
| 6319 Line-up functions are passed a single argument, the syntactic | |
| 6320 element (see below). The return value is a @code{c-offsets-alist} | |
| 6321 offset specification: for example, an integer, a symbol such as | |
| 6322 @code{+}, a vector, @code{nil}@footnote{Returning @code{nil} is useful | |
| 6323 when the offset specification for a syntactic element is a list | |
| 6324 containing the line-up function (@pxref{c-offsets-alist}).}, or even | |
| 6325 another line-up function. Full details of these are in | |
| 6326 @ref{c-offsets-alist}. | |
| 6327 | |
| 6328 Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the | |
| 6329 buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do | |
| 6330 @dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e. setting text properties for caching | |
| 6331 purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run. | |
| 6332 | |
| 6333 The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is | |
| 6334 a cons cell of the form | |
| 6335 | |
| 6336 @example | |
| 6337 (@r{@var{syntactic-symbol}} . @r{@var{anchor-position}}) | |
| 6338 @end example | |
| 6339 | |
| 6340 @noindent | |
| 6341 @c FIXME!!! The following sentence might be better omitted, since the | |
| 6342 @c information is in the cross reference "Syntactic Analysis". 2005/10/2. | |
| 6343 where @var{syntactic-symbol} is the symbol that the function was | |
| 6344 called for, and @var{anchor-position} is the anchor position (if any) | |
| 6345 for the construct that triggered the syntactic symbol | |
| 6346 (@pxref{Syntactic Analysis}). This cons cell is how the syntactic | |
| 6347 element of a line used to be represented in @ccmode{} 5.28 and | |
| 6348 earlier. Line-up functions are still passed this cons cell, so as to | |
| 6349 preserve compatibility with older configurations. In the future, we | |
| 6350 may decide to convert to using the full list format---you can prepare | |
| 6351 your setup for this by using the access functions | |
| 6352 (@code{c-langelem-sym}, etc.) described below. | |
| 6353 | |
| 6354 @vindex c-syntactic-element | |
| 6355 @vindex syntactic-element (c-) | |
| 6356 @vindex c-syntactic-context | |
| 6357 @vindex syntactic-context (c-) | |
| 6358 Some syntactic symbols, e.g. @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more | |
| 6359 info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be | |
| 6360 interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed | |
| 6361 through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can | |
| 6362 get this information from the variable @code{c-syntactic-element}, | |
| 6363 which is dynamically bound to the complete syntactic element. The | |
| 6364 variable @code{c-syntactic-context} might also be useful - it gets | |
| 6365 dynamically bound to the complete syntactic context. @xref{Custom | |
| 6366 Braces}. | |
| 6367 | |
| 6368 @ccmode{} provides a few functions to access parts of syntactic | |
| 6369 elements in a more abstract way. Besides making the code easier to | |
| 6370 read, they also hide the difference between the old cons cell form | |
| 6371 used in the line-up function argument and the new list form used in | |
| 6372 @code{c-syntactic-element} and everywhere else. The functions are: | |
| 6373 | |
| 6374 @defun c-langelem-sym langelem | |
| 6375 @findex langelem-sym (c-) | |
| 6376 Return the syntactic symbol in @var{langelem}. | |
| 6377 @end defun | |
| 6378 | |
| 6379 @defun c-langelem-pos langelem | |
| 6380 @findex langelem-pos (c-) | |
| 6381 Return the anchor position in @var{langelem}, or nil if there is none. | |
| 6382 @end defun | |
| 6383 | |
| 6384 @defun c-langelem-col langelem &optional preserve-point | |
| 6385 @findex langelem-col (c-) | |
| 6386 Return the column of the anchor position in @var{langelem}. Also move | |
| 6387 the point to that position unless @var{preserve-point} is | |
| 6388 non-@code{nil}. | |
| 6389 @end defun | |
| 6390 | |
| 6391 @defun c-langelem-2nd-pos langelem | |
| 6392 @findex langelem-2nd-pos (c-) | |
| 6393 Return the secondary position in @var{langelem}, or @code{nil} if there | |
| 6394 is none. | |
| 6395 | |
| 6396 Note that the return value of this function is always @code{nil} if | |
| 6397 @var{langelem} is in the old cons cell form. Thus this function is | |
| 6398 only meaningful when used on syntactic elements taken from | |
| 6399 @code{c-syntactic-element} or @code{c-syntactic-context}. | |
| 6400 @end defun | |
| 6401 | |
| 6402 Custom line-up functions can be as simple or as complex as you like, and | |
| 6403 any syntactic symbol that appears in @code{c-offsets-alist} can have a | |
| 6404 custom line-up function associated with it. | |
| 6405 | |
| 6406 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6407 @node Other Indentation, , Custom Line-Up, Customizing Indentation | |
| 6408 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6409 @section Other Special Indentations | |
| 6410 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6411 | |
| 6412 Here are the remaining odds and ends regarding indentation: | |
| 6413 | |
| 6414 @defopt c-label-minimum-indentation | |
| 6415 @vindex label-minimum-indentation (c-) | |
| 6416 In @samp{gnu} style (@pxref{Built-in Styles}), a minimum indentation is | |
| 6417 imposed on lines inside code blocks. This minimum indentation is | |
| 6418 controlled by this style variable. The default value is 1. | |
| 6419 | |
| 6420 @findex c-gnu-impose-minimum | |
| 6421 @findex gnu-impose-minimum (c-) | |
| 6422 It's the function @code{c-gnu-impose-minimum} that enforces this minimum | |
| 6423 indentation. It must be present on @code{c-special-indent-hook} to | |
| 6424 work. | |
| 6425 @end defopt | |
| 6426 | |
| 6427 @defopt c-special-indent-hook | |
| 6428 @vindex special-indent-hook (c-) | |
| 6429 This style variable is a standard hook variable that is called after | |
| 6430 every line is indented by @ccmode{}. It is called only if | |
| 6431 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is non-@code{nil} (which it is by | |
| 6432 default (@pxref{Indentation Engine Basics})). You can put a function | |
| 6433 on this hook to do any special indentation or ad hoc line adjustments | |
| 6434 your style dictates, such as adding extra indentation to constructors | |
| 6435 or destructor declarations in a class definition, etc. Sometimes it | |
| 6436 is better to write a custom Line-up Function instead (@pxref{Custom | |
| 6437 Line-Up}). | |
| 6438 | |
| 6439 When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable | |
| 6440 @code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context | |
| 6441 (i.e. what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line. | |
| 6442 @xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark | |
| 6443 inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e. you'll probably | |
| 6444 want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The | |
| 6445 numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the | |
| 6446 indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point | |
| 6447 itself will still be over the same piece of text.}. | |
| 6448 | |
| 6449 Setting @code{c-special-indent-hook} in style definitions is handled | |
| 6450 slightly differently from other variables---A style can only add | |
| 6451 functions to this hook, not remove them. @xref{Style Variables}. | |
| 6452 @end defopt | |
| 6453 | |
| 6454 | |
| 6455 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6456 @node Custom Macros, Odds and Ends, Customizing Indentation, Top | |
| 6457 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6458 @chapter Customizing Macros | |
| 6459 @cindex macros | |
| 6460 @cindex preprocessor directives | |
| 6461 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6462 | |
| 6463 Normally, the lines in a multi-line macro are indented relative to | |
|
86093
d223d695f3f3
(Electric Keys, Electric Keys, Custom Macros): Fix typos.
Juanma Barranquero <lekktu@gmail.com>
parents:
85173
diff
changeset
|
6464 each other as though they were code. You can suppress this behavior |
| 84286 | 6465 by setting the following user option: |
| 6466 | |
| 6467 @defopt c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros | |
| 6468 @vindex syntactic-indentation-in-macros (c-) | |
| 6469 Enable syntactic analysis inside macros, which is the default. If this | |
| 6470 is @code{nil}, all lines inside macro definitions are analyzed as | |
| 6471 @code{cpp-macro-cont}. | |
| 6472 @end defopt | |
| 6473 | |
| 6474 @ccmode{} provides some tools to help keep the line continuation | |
| 6475 backslashes in macros neat and tidy. Their precise action is | |
| 6476 customized with these variables: | |
| 6477 | |
| 6478 @defopt c-backslash-column | |
| 6479 @vindex backslash-column (c-) | |
| 6480 @defoptx c-backslash-max-column | |
| 6481 @vindex backslash-max-column (c-) | |
| 6482 These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation | |
| 6483 backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that | |
| 6484 automatically insert or align such backslashes, | |
| 6485 e.g. @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}. | |
| 6486 | |
| 6487 @code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the | |
| 6488 backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the | |
| 6489 next tab stop (i.e. next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is | |
| 6490 used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they | |
| 6491 remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past | |
| 6492 @code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the | |
| 6493 macro will be kept at that column, so that the lines which are too | |
| 6494 long ``stick out'' instead. | |
| 6495 | |
| 6496 Don't ever set these variables to @code{nil}. If you want to disable | |
| 6497 the automatic alignment of backslashes, use | |
| 6498 @code{c-auto-align-backslashes}. | |
| 6499 @end defopt | |
| 6500 | |
| 6501 @defopt c-auto-align-backslashes | |
| 6502 @vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-) | |
| 6503 Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if | |
| 6504 non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted | |
| 6505 automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g. by | |
| 6506 @code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other | |
| 6507 backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set. | |
| 6508 | |
| 6509 If @code{c-auto-align-backslashes} is @code{nil}, automatically | |
| 6510 inserted backslashes are preceded by a single space, and backslashes | |
| 6511 get aligned only when you explicitly invoke the command | |
| 6512 @code{c-backslash-region} (@kbd{C-c C-\}). | |
| 6513 @end defopt | |
| 6514 | |
| 6515 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6516 @node Odds and Ends, Sample .emacs File, Custom Macros, Top | |
| 6517 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6518 @chapter Odds and Ends | |
| 6519 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6520 | |
| 6521 The stuff that didn't fit in anywhere else is documented here. | |
| 6522 | |
| 6523 @defopt c-require-final-newline | |
| 6524 @vindex require-final-newline (c-) | |
| 6525 Controls whether a final newline is enforced when the file is saved. | |
| 6526 The value is an association list that for each language mode specifies | |
| 6527 the value to give to @code{require-final-newline} (@pxref{Saving | |
| 6528 Buffers,,, @lispref{}, @lispreftitle{}}) at mode initialization. If a | |
| 6529 language isn't present on the association list, CC Mode won't touch | |
| 6530 @code{require-final-newline} in buffers for that language. | |
| 6531 | |
| 6532 The default is to set @code{require-final-newline} to @code{t} in the | |
| 6533 languages that mandate that source files should end with newlines. | |
| 6534 These are C, C++ and Objective-C. | |
| 6535 @end defopt | |
| 6536 | |
| 6537 @defopt c-echo-syntactic-information-p | |
| 6538 @vindex echo-syntactic-information-p (c-) | |
| 6539 If non-@code{nil}, the syntactic analysis for the current line is shown | |
| 6540 in the echo area when it's indented (unless | |
| 6541 @code{c-syntactic-indentation} is @code{nil}). That's useful when | |
| 6542 finding out which syntactic symbols to modify to get the indentation you | |
| 6543 want. | |
| 6544 @end defopt | |
| 6545 | |
| 6546 @defopt c-report-syntactic-errors | |
| 6547 @vindex report-syntactic-errors (c-) | |
| 6548 If non-@code{nil}, certain syntactic errors are reported with a ding and | |
| 6549 a message, for example when an @code{else} is indented for which there | |
| 6550 is no corresponding @code{if}. | |
| 6551 | |
| 6552 Note however that @ccmode{} doesn't make any special effort to check for | |
| 6553 syntactic errors; that's the job of the compiler. The reason it can | |
| 6554 report cases like the one above is that it can't find the correct | |
| 6555 anchoring position to indent the line in that case. | |
| 6556 @end defopt | |
| 6557 | |
| 6558 | |
| 6559 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6560 @node Sample .emacs File, Performance Issues, Odds and Ends, Top | |
| 6561 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6562 @appendix Sample .emacs File | |
| 6563 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6564 | |
| 6565 Here's a sample .emacs file fragment that might help you along the way. | |
| 6566 Just copy this region and paste it into your .emacs file. You might want | |
| 6567 to change some of the actual values. | |
| 6568 | |
| 6569 @verbatim | |
| 6570 ;; Make a non-standard key binding. We can put this in | |
| 6571 ;; c-mode-base-map because c-mode-map, c++-mode-map, and so on, | |
| 6572 ;; inherit from it. | |
| 6573 (defun my-c-initialization-hook () | |
| 6574 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break)) | |
| 6575 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-c-initialization-hook) | |
| 6576 | |
| 6577 ;; offset customizations not in my-c-style | |
| 6578 ;; This will take precedence over any setting of the syntactic symbol | |
| 6579 ;; made by a style. | |
| 6580 (setq c-offsets-alist '((member-init-intro . ++))) | |
| 6581 | |
| 6582 ;; Create my personal style. | |
| 6583 (defconst my-c-style | |
| 6584 '((c-tab-always-indent . t) | |
| 6585 (c-comment-only-line-offset . 4) | |
| 6586 (c-hanging-braces-alist . ((substatement-open after) | |
| 6587 (brace-list-open))) | |
| 6588 (c-hanging-colons-alist . ((member-init-intro before) | |
| 6589 (inher-intro) | |
| 6590 (case-label after) | |
| 6591 (label after) | |
| 6592 (access-label after))) | |
| 6593 (c-cleanup-list . (scope-operator | |
| 6594 empty-defun-braces | |
| 6595 defun-close-semi)) | |
| 6596 (c-offsets-alist . ((arglist-close . c-lineup-arglist) | |
| 6597 (substatement-open . 0) | |
| 6598 (case-label . 4) | |
| 6599 (block-open . 0) | |
| 6600 (knr-argdecl-intro . -))) | |
| 6601 (c-echo-syntactic-information-p . t)) | |
| 6602 "My C Programming Style") | |
| 6603 (c-add-style "PERSONAL" my-c-style) | |
| 6604 | |
| 6605 ;; Customizations for all modes in CC Mode. | |
| 6606 (defun my-c-mode-common-hook () | |
| 6607 ;; set my personal style for the current buffer | |
| 6608 (c-set-style "PERSONAL") | |
| 6609 ;; other customizations | |
| 6610 (setq tab-width 8 | |
| 6611 ;; this will make sure spaces are used instead of tabs | |
| 6612 indent-tabs-mode nil) | |
| 6613 ;; we like auto-newline, but not hungry-delete | |
| 6614 (c-toggle-auto-newline 1)) | |
| 6615 (add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook 'my-c-mode-common-hook) | |
| 6616 @end verbatim | |
| 6617 | |
| 6618 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6619 @node Performance Issues, Limitations and Known Bugs, Sample .emacs File, Top | |
| 6620 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6621 @chapter Performance Issues | |
| 6622 @cindex performance | |
| 6623 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6624 | |
| 6625 @comment FIXME: (ACM, 2003/5/24). Check whether AWK needs mentioning here. | |
| 6626 | |
| 6627 C and its derivative languages are highly complex creatures. Often, | |
| 6628 ambiguous code situations arise that require @ccmode{} to scan large | |
| 6629 portions of the buffer to determine syntactic context. Such | |
| 6630 pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This | |
| 6631 section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts | |
| 6632 with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance. | |
| 6633 | |
| 6634 The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e. take | |
| 6635 more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation. | |
| 6636 I.e. it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations, | |
| 6637 which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like | |
| 6638 reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets | |
| 6639 slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in | |
| 6640 size or as the macro or comment you're editing gets bigger, then chances | |
| 6641 are that something isn't working right. You should consider reporting | |
| 6642 it, unless it's something that's mentioned in this section. | |
| 6643 | |
| 6644 Because @ccmode{} has to scan the buffer backwards from the current | |
| 6645 insertion point, and because C's syntax is fairly difficult to parse in | |
| 6646 the backwards direction, @ccmode{} often tries to find the nearest | |
| 6647 position higher up in the buffer from which to begin a forward scan | |
| 6648 (it's typically an opening or closing parenthesis of some kind). The | |
| 6649 farther this position is from the current insertion point, the slower it | |
| 6650 gets. | |
| 6651 | |
| 6652 @findex beginning-of-defun | |
| 6653 In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the | |
| 6654 opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g. a function in C, | |
| 6655 or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost | |
| 6656 column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as | |
| 6657 embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now | |
| 6658 caches syntactic information much better, so that the delay caused by | |
| 6659 searching for such a brace when it's not in column 0 is minimal, | |
| 6660 except perhaps when you've just moved a long way inside the file. | |
| 6661 | |
| 6662 @findex defun-prompt-regexp | |
| 6663 @vindex c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp | |
| 6664 @vindex Java-defun-prompt-regexp (c-) | |
| 6665 A special note about @code{defun-prompt-regexp} in Java mode: The common | |
| 6666 style is to hang the opening braces of functions and classes on the | |
| 6667 right side of the line, and that doesn't work well with the Emacs | |
| 6668 approach. @ccmode{} comes with a constant | |
| 6669 @code{c-Java-defun-prompt-regexp} which tries to define a regular | |
| 6670 expression usable for this style, but there are problems with it. In | |
| 6671 some cases it can cause @code{beginning-of-defun} to hang@footnote{This | |
| 6672 has been observed in Emacs 19.34 and XEmacs 19.15.}. For this reason, | |
| 6673 it is not used by default, but if you feel adventurous, you can set | |
| 6674 @code{defun-prompt-regexp} to it in your mode hook. In any event, | |
| 6675 setting and relying on @code{defun-prompt-regexp} will definitely slow | |
| 6676 things down because (X)Emacs will be doing regular expression searches a | |
| 6677 lot, so you'll probably be taking a hit either way! | |
| 6678 | |
| 6679 @ccmode{} maintains a cache of the opening parentheses of the blocks | |
| 6680 surrounding the point, and it adapts that cache as the point is moved | |
| 6681 around. That means that in bad cases it can take noticeable time to | |
| 6682 indent a line in a new surrounding, but after that it gets fast as long | |
| 6683 as the point isn't moved far off. The farther the point is moved, the | |
| 6684 less useful is the cache. Since editing typically is done in ``chunks'' | |
| 6685 rather than on single lines far apart from each other, the cache | |
| 6686 typically gives good performance even when the code doesn't fit the | |
| 6687 Emacs approach to finding the defun starts. | |
| 6688 | |
| 6689 @vindex c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p | |
| 6690 @vindex enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p (c-) | |
| 6691 XEmacs users can set the variable | |
| 6692 @code{c-enable-xemacs-performance-kludge-p} to non-@code{nil}. This | |
| 6693 tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some | |
| 6694 circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than | |
| 6695 @code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for | |
| 6696 styles where these braces are hung (e.g. most JDK-derived Java styles), | |
| 6697 this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines | |
| 6698 from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to | |
| 6699 Emacs' recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero, | |
| 6700 this hack can degrade performance by about as much. Thus this variable | |
| 6701 is set to @code{nil} by default, since the Emacs-friendly styles should | |
| 6702 be more common (and encouraged!). Note that this variable has no effect | |
| 6703 in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs | |
| 6704 22.1 as of this writing in February 2007). | |
| 6705 | |
| 6706 Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace, | |
| 6707 i.e. comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a | |
| 6708 huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the | |
| 6709 text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've | |
| 6710 edited other parts of the file and then moved back). | |
| 6711 | |
| 6712 Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on | |
| 6713 decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that | |
| 6714 level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only | |
| 6715 fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e. Lazy Lock or Just-in-time | |
| 6716 Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole | |
| 6717 buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is | |
| 6718 a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen. | |
| 6719 | |
| 6720 The most effective way to speed up font locking is to reduce the | |
| 6721 decoration level to 2 by setting @code{font-lock-maximum-decoration} | |
| 6722 appropriately. That level is designed to be as pretty as possible | |
| 6723 without sacrificing performance. @xref{Font Locking Preliminaries}, for | |
| 6724 more info. | |
| 6725 | |
| 6726 | |
| 6727 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6728 @node Limitations and Known Bugs, FAQ, Performance Issues, Top | |
| 6729 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6730 @chapter Limitations and Known Bugs | |
| 6731 @cindex limitations | |
| 6732 @cindex bugs | |
| 6733 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6734 | |
| 6735 @itemize @bullet | |
| 6736 @item | |
| 6737 @ccmode{} doesn't support trigraphs. (These are character sequences | |
| 6738 such as @samp{??(}, which represents @samp{[}. They date from a time | |
| 6739 when some character sets didn't have all the characters that C needs, | |
| 6740 and are now utterly obsolete.) | |
| 6741 | |
| 6742 @item | |
| 6743 There is no way to apply auto newline settings (@pxref{Auto-newlines}) | |
| 6744 on already typed lines. That's only a feature to ease interactive | |
| 6745 editing. | |
| 6746 | |
| 6747 To generalize this issue a bit: @ccmode{} is not intended to be used as | |
| 6748 a reformatter for old code in some more or less batch-like way. With | |
| 6749 the exception of some functions like @code{c-indent-region}, it's only | |
| 6750 geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no | |
| 6751 intention to change this goal. | |
| 6752 | |
| 6753 If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some | |
| 6754 other tool instead, e.g. @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent' | |
| 6755 Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than | |
| 6756 @ccmode{}. | |
| 6757 | |
| 6758 @item | |
| 6759 The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete. | |
| 6760 When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents | |
| 6761 it and font-locks it OK. Templates used in expressions, and nested | |
| 6762 templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify | |
| 6763 the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}. | |
| 6764 | |
| 6765 @item | |
|
92570
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6766 In a @dfn{k&r region} (the part of an old-fashioned C function |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6767 declaration which specifies the types of its parameters, coming |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6768 between the parameter list and the opening brace), there should be at |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6769 most 20 top-level parenthesis and bracket pairs. This limit has been |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6770 imposed for performance reasons. If it is violated, the source file |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6771 might be incorrectly indented or fontified. |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6772 |
|
0c777c6d1ca8
(Limitations and Known Bugs): State that the number of parens/brackets in
Alan Mackenzie <acm@muc.de>
parents:
87903
diff
changeset
|
6773 @item |
| 84286 | 6774 On loading @ccmode{}, sometimes this error message appears: |
| 6775 | |
| 6776 @example | |
| 6777 File mode specification error: (void-variable c-font-lock-keywords-3) | |
| 6778 @end example | |
| 6779 | |
| 6780 This is due to a bug in the function @code{eval-after-load} in some | |
| 6781 versions of (X)Emacs. It can manifest itself when there is a symbolic | |
| 6782 link in the path of the directory which contains (X)Emacs. As a | |
| 6783 workaround, put the following into your @file{.emacs} file, fairly | |
| 6784 early on: | |
| 6785 | |
| 6786 @example | |
| 6787 (defun my-load-cc-fonts () | |
| 6788 (require "cc-fonts")) | |
| 6789 (add-hook 'c-initialization-hook 'my-load-cc-fonts) | |
| 6790 @end example | |
| 6791 @end itemize | |
| 6792 | |
| 6793 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6794 @node FAQ, Updating CC Mode, Limitations and Known Bugs, Top | |
| 6795 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6796 @appendix Frequently Asked Questions | |
| 6797 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6798 | |
| 6799 @itemize @bullet | |
| 6800 @item | |
| 6801 @emph{How can I change the indent level from 4 spaces to 2 spaces?} | |
| 6802 | |
| 6803 Set the variable @code{c-basic-offset}. @xref{Getting Started}. | |
| 6804 | |
| 6805 @item | |
| 6806 @kindex RET | |
| 6807 @kindex C-j | |
| 6808 @emph{Why doesn't the @kbd{RET} key indent the new line?} | |
| 6809 | |
| 6810 Emacs' convention is that @kbd{RET} just adds a newline, and that | |
| 6811 @kbd{C-j} adds a newline and indents it. You can make @kbd{RET} do this | |
| 6812 too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}: | |
| 6813 | |
| 6814 @example | |
| 6815 (define-key c-mode-base-map "\C-m" 'c-context-line-break) | |
| 6816 @end example | |
| 6817 | |
| 6818 @xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want | |
| 6819 this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS! @t{:-)} | |
| 6820 | |
| 6821 @item | |
| 6822 @emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?} | |
| 6823 | |
| 6824 Deactivate ``electric minor mode'' with @kbd{C-c C-l}. @xref{Getting | |
| 6825 Started}. | |
| 6826 | |
| 6827 @item | |
| 6828 @kindex C-x h | |
| 6829 @kindex C-M-\ | |
| 6830 @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?} | |
| 6831 | |
| 6832 Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit | |
| 6833 @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}. | |
| 6834 | |
| 6835 @item | |
| 6836 @kindex C-M-q | |
| 6837 @kindex C-M-u | |
| 6838 @emph{How do I reindent the current block?} | |
| 6839 | |
| 6840 First move to the brace which opens the block with @kbd{C-M-u}, then | |
| 6841 reindent that expression with @kbd{C-M-q}. @xref{Indentation | |
| 6842 Commands}. | |
| 6843 | |
| 6844 @item | |
| 6845 @emph{I put @code{(c-set-offset 'substatement-open 0)} in my | |
| 6846 @file{.emacs} file but I get an error saying that @code{c-set-offset}'s | |
| 6847 function definition is void. What's wrong?} | |
| 6848 | |
| 6849 This means that @ccmode{} hasn't yet been loaded into your Emacs | |
| 6850 session by the time the @code{c-set-offset} call is reached, most | |
| 6851 likely because @ccmode{} is being autoloaded. Instead of putting the | |
| 6852 @code{c-set-offset} line in your top-level @file{.emacs} file, put it | |
| 6853 in your @code{c-initialization-hook} (@pxref{CC Hooks}), or simply | |
| 6854 modify @code{c-offsets-alist} directly: | |
| 6855 | |
| 6856 @example | |
| 6857 (setq c-offsets-alist '((substatement-open . 0))) | |
| 6858 @end example | |
| 6859 | |
| 6860 @item | |
| 6861 @cindex open paren in column zero | |
| 6862 @emph{I have an open paren character at column zero inside a comment or | |
| 6863 multiline string literal, and it causes the fontification and/or | |
| 6864 indentation to go haywire. What gives?} | |
| 6865 | |
| 6866 It's due to the ad-hoc rule in (X)Emacs that such open parens always | |
| 6867 start defuns (which translates to functions, classes, namespaces or any | |
| 6868 other top-level block constructs in the @ccmode{} languages). | |
| 6869 @ifset XEMACS | |
| 6870 @xref{Defuns,,, xemacs, XEmacs User's Manual}, for details. | |
| 6871 @end ifset | |
| 6872 @ifclear XEMACS | |
| 6873 @xref{Left Margin Paren,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for details | |
| 6874 (@xref{Defuns,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, in the Emacs 20 manual). | |
| 6875 @end ifclear | |
| 6876 | |
| 6877 This heuristic is built into the core syntax analysis routines in | |
| 6878 (X)Emacs, so it's not really a @ccmode{} issue. However, in Emacs | |
| 6879 21.1 it became possible to turn it off@footnote{Using the variable | |
| 6880 @code{open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start}.} and @ccmode{} does so | |
| 6881 there since it's got its own system to keep track of blocks. | |
| 6882 | |
| 6883 @end itemize | |
| 6884 | |
| 6885 | |
| 6886 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6887 @node Updating CC Mode, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, FAQ, Top | |
| 6888 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6889 @appendix Getting the Latest CC Mode Release | |
| 6890 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6891 | |
| 6892 @ccmode{} has been standard with all versions of Emacs since 19.34 and | |
| 6893 of XEmacs since 19.16. | |
| 6894 | |
| 6895 @cindex web site | |
| 6896 Due to release schedule skew, it is likely that all of these Emacsen | |
| 6897 have old versions of @ccmode{} and so should be upgraded. Access to the | |
| 6898 @ccmode{} source code, as well as more detailed information on Emacsen | |
| 6899 compatibility, etc. are all available on the web site: | |
| 6900 | |
| 6901 @quotation | |
| 6902 @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} | |
| 6903 @end quotation | |
| 6904 | |
| 6905 | |
| 6906 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6907 @node Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, GNU Free Documentation License, Updating CC Mode, Top | |
| 6908 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6909 @appendix Mailing Lists and Submitting Bug Reports | |
| 6910 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6911 | |
| 6912 @kindex C-c C-b | |
| 6913 @findex c-submit-bug-report | |
| 6914 @findex submit-bug-report (c-) | |
| 6915 To report bugs, use the @kbd{C-c C-b} (bound to | |
| 6916 @code{c-submit-bug-report}) command. This provides vital information | |
| 6917 we need to reproduce your problem. Make sure you include a concise, | |
| 6918 but complete code example. Please try to boil your example down to | |
| 6919 just the essential code needed to reproduce the problem, and include | |
| 6920 an exact recipe of steps needed to expose the bug. Be especially sure | |
| 6921 to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if | |
| 6922 you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it. | |
| 6923 | |
| 6924 Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any | |
| 6925 customizations loaded (i.e. start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file} | |
| 6926 arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused | |
| 6927 by faulty customizations in either your own or your site | |
| 6928 configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the | |
| 6929 Emacs Lisp code that triggers the bug and include it in your report. | |
| 6930 | |
| 6931 @cindex bug report mailing list | |
| 6932 Bug reports should be sent to @email{bug-cc-mode@@gnu.org}. You can | |
| 6933 also send other questions and suggestions (kudos? @t{;-)} to that | |
| 6934 address. It's a mailing list which you can join or browse an archive | |
| 6935 of; see the web site at @uref{http://cc-mode.sourceforge.net/} for | |
| 6936 further details. | |
| 6937 | |
| 6938 @cindex announcement mailing list | |
| 6939 If you want to get announcements of new @ccmode{} releases, send the | |
| 6940 word @emph{subscribe} in the body of a message to | |
| 6941 @email{cc-mode-announce-request@@lists.sourceforge.net}. It's possible | |
| 6942 to subscribe from the web site too. Announcements will also be posted | |
| 6943 to the Usenet newsgroups @code{gnu.emacs.sources}, @code{comp.emacs}, | |
| 6944 @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.lang.c}, @code{comp.lang.c++}, | |
| 6945 @code{comp.lang.objective-c}, @code{comp.lang.java.softwaretools}, | |
| 6946 @code{comp.lang.idl}, and @code{comp.lang.awk}. | |
| 6947 @c There is no newsgroup for Pike. :-( | |
| 6948 | |
| 6949 | |
| 6950 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Command and Function Index, Mailing Lists and Bug Reports, Top | |
| 6951 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License | |
| 6952 @include doclicense.texi | |
| 6953 | |
| 6954 | |
| 6955 @c Removed the tentative node "Mode Initialization" from here, 2005/8/27. | |
| 6956 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6957 @node Command and Function Index, Variable Index, GNU Free Documentation License, Top | |
| 6958 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6959 @unnumbered Command and Function Index | |
| 6960 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6961 | |
| 6962 Since most @ccmode{} commands are prepended with the string | |
| 6963 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its | |
| 6964 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name. | |
| 6965 @iftex | |
| 6966 @sp 2 | |
| 6967 @end iftex | |
| 6968 @printindex fn | |
| 6969 | |
| 6970 | |
| 6971 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6972 @node Variable Index, Concept and Key Index, Command and Function Index, Top | |
| 6973 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6974 @unnumbered Variable Index | |
| 6975 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6976 | |
| 6977 Since most @ccmode{} variables are prepended with the string | |
| 6978 @samp{c-}, each appears under its @code{c-@var{thing}} name and its | |
| 6979 @code{@var{thing} (c-)} name. | |
| 6980 @iftex | |
| 6981 @sp 2 | |
| 6982 @end iftex | |
| 6983 @printindex vr | |
| 6984 | |
| 6985 | |
| 6986 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6987 @node Concept and Key Index, , Variable Index, Top | |
| 6988 @comment node-name, next, previous, up | |
| 6989 @unnumbered Concept and Key Index | |
| 6990 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6991 | |
| 6992 @printindex cp | |
| 6993 | |
| 6994 | |
| 6995 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6996 @comment Epilogue. | |
| 6997 @comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! | |
| 6998 | |
| 6999 @bye | |
| 7000 | |
| 7001 @ignore | |
| 7002 arch-tag: c4cab162-5e57-4366-bdce-4a9db2fc97f0 | |
| 7003 @end ignore |
